TMS570LS0714 [TI]

16/32 位 RISC 闪存 MCU,Arm Cortex-R4F,通过 Q-100 车规认证;
TMS570LS0714
型号: TMS570LS0714
厂家: TEXAS INSTRUMENTS    TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
描述:

16/32 位 RISC 闪存 MCU,Arm Cortex-R4F,通过 Q-100 车规认证

闪存
文件: 总163页 (文件大小:8884K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Sample &  
Buy  
Support &  
Community  
Product  
Folder  
Tools &  
Software  
Technical  
Documents  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
TMS570LS0714 16- and 32-Bit RISC Flash Microcontroller  
1 Device Overview  
1.1 Features  
1
• High-Performance Automotive-Grade  
Microcontroller (MCU) for Safety-Critical  
Applications  
• Enhanced Timing Peripherals  
– 7 Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM)  
Modules  
– Dual CPUs Running in Lockstep  
– ECC on Flash and RAM Interfaces  
– Built-In Self-Test (BIST) for CPU and On-chip  
RAMs  
– Error Signaling Module With Error Pin  
– Voltage and Clock Monitoring  
– 6 Enhanced Capture (eCAP) Modules  
– 2 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEP)  
Modules  
• Two Next Generation High-End Timer (N2HET)  
Modules  
– N2HET1: 32 Programmable Channels  
– N2HET2: 18 Programmable Channels  
– 160-Word Instruction RAM With Parity  
Protection Each  
– Each N2HET Includes Hardware Angle  
Generator  
– Dedicated High-End Timer Transfer Unit (HTU)  
for Each N2HET  
• ARM® Cortex®-R4F 32-Bit RISC CPU  
– 1.66 DMIPS/MHz With 8-Stage Pipeline  
– FPU With Single and Double Precision  
– 12-Region Memory Protection Unit (MPU)  
– Open Architecture With Third-Party Support  
• Operating Conditions  
– Up to 160-MHz System Clock  
• Two 12-Bit Multibuffered ADC Modules  
– ADC1: 24 Channels  
– Core Supply Voltage (VCC): 1.14 to 1.32 V  
– I/O Supply Voltage (VCCIO): 3.0 to 3.6 V  
• Integrated Memory  
– ADC2: 16 Channels  
– 16 Shared Channels  
– 64 Result Buffers With Parity Protection Each  
• Multiple Communication Interfaces  
– Up to Three CAN Controllers (DCANs)  
– 64 Mailboxes With Parity Protection Each  
– 768KB of Flash With ECC  
– 128KB of RAM With ECC  
– 64KB of Flash for Emulated EEPROM With  
ECC  
• Common Platform Architecture  
– Compliant to CAN Protocol Version 2.0A and  
2.0B  
– Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)  
– 3 Multibuffered Serial Peripheral Interfaces  
(MibSPIs)  
– 128 Words With Parity Protection Each  
– 8 Transfer Groups  
– One Standard Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)  
Module  
– Two UART (SCI) Interfaces, One With Local  
Interconnect Network (LIN 2.1) Interface  
Support  
– Consistent Memory Map Across Family  
– Real-Time Interrupt Timer (RTI) OS Timer  
– 128-Channel Vectored Interrupt Module (VIM)  
– 2-Channel Cyclic Redundancy Checker (CRC)  
• Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller  
– 16 Channels and 32 Peripheral Requests  
– Parity for Control Packet RAM  
– DMA Accesses Protected by Dedicated MPU  
• Frequency-Modulated Phase-Locked Loop  
(FMPLL) With Built-In Slip Detector  
• IEEE 1149.1 JTAG, Boundary Scan and ARM  
CoreSight™ Components  
• Advanced JTAG Security Module (AJSM)  
• Up to 64 General-Purpose I/O (GIO) Pins  
• Packages  
– 144-Pin Quad Flatpack (PGE) [Green]  
– 100-Pin Quad Flatpack (PZ) [Green]  
– Up to 16 GIO Pins With Interrupt Generation  
Capability  
1
An IMPORTANT NOTICE at the end of this data sheet addresses availability, warranty, changes, use in safety-critical applications,  
intellectual property matters and other important disclaimers. PRODUCTION DATA.  
 
 
 
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
1.2 Applications  
Electric Power Steering (EPS)  
Braking Systems (ABS and ESC)  
HEV and EV Inverter Systems  
Battery-Management Systems  
Active Driver Assistance Systems  
Aerospace and Avionics  
Railway Communications  
Off-road Vehicles  
2
Device Overview  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
1.3 Description  
The TMS570LS0714 device is part of the Hercules TMS570 series of high-performance automotive-grade  
ARM® Cortex®-R-based MCUs. Comprehensive documentation, tools, and software are available to  
assist in the development of ISO 26262 and IEC 61508 functional safety applications. Start evaluating  
today with the Hercules TMS570 LaunchPad Development Kit. The TMS570LS0714 device has on-chip  
diagnostic features including: dual CPUs in lockstep; CPU and memory Built-In Self-Test (BIST) logic;  
ECC on both the flash and the SRAM; parity on peripheral memories; and loopback capability on most  
peripheral I/Os.  
The TMS570LS0714 device integrates the ARM Cortex-R4F floating-point CPU which offers an efficient  
1.66 DMIPS/MHz, and has configurations which can run up to 160 MHz providing up to 265 DMIPS. The  
TMS570 device supports the word invariant big-endian [BE32] format.  
The TMS570LS0714 device has 768KB of integrated flash and 128KB of RAM configurations with single-  
bit error correction and double-bit error detection. The flash memory on this device is nonvolatile,  
electrically erasable and programmable, and is implemented with a 64-bit-wide data bus interface. The  
flash operates on a 3.3-V supply input (same level as the I/O supply) for all read, program, and erase  
operations. The SRAM supports single-cycle read and write accesses in byte, halfword, word, and  
doubleword modes throughout the supported frequency range.  
The TMS570LS0714 device features peripherals for real-time control-based applications, including two  
Next-Generation High-End Timer (N2HET) timing coprocessors with up to 44 total I/O terminals, seven  
Enhanced PWM (ePWM) modules with up to 14 outputs, six Enhanced Capture (eCAP) modules, two  
Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEP) modules, and two 12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converters  
(ADCs) supporting up to 24 inputs.  
The N2HET is an advanced intelligent timer that provides sophisticated timing functions for real-time  
applications. The timer is software-controlled, using a reduced instruction set, with a specialized timer  
micromachine and an attached I/O port. The N2HET can be used for pulse-width-modulated outputs,  
capture or compare inputs, or general-purpose I/O (GIO). The N2HET is especially well suited for  
applications requiring multiple sensor information and drive actuators with complex and accurate time  
pulses. A High-End Timer Transfer Unit (HTU) can transfer N2HET data to or from main memory. A  
Memory Protection Unit (MPU) is built into the HTU.  
The ePWM module can generate complex pulse width waveforms with minimal CPU overhead or  
intervention. The ePWM is easy to use and supports complementary PWMs and deadband generation.  
With integrated trip zone protection and synchronization with the on-chip MibADC, the ePWM is ideal for  
digital motor control applications.  
The eCAP module is essential in systems where the accurately timed capture of external events is  
important. The eCAP can also be used to monitor the ePWM outputs or to generate simple PWM when  
not needed for capture applications.  
The eQEP module is used for direct interface with a linear or rotary incremental encoder to get position,  
direction, and speed information from a rotating machine as used in high-performance motion and  
position-control systems.  
The device has two 12-bit-resolution MibADCs with 24 total inputs and 64 words of parity-protected buffer  
RAM each. The MibADC channels can be converted individually or can be grouped by software for  
sequential conversion sequences. Sixteen inputs are shared between the two MibADCs. There are three  
separate groups. Each group can be converted once when triggered or configured for continuous  
conversion mode. The MibADC has a 10-bit mode for use when compatibility with older devices or faster  
conversion time is desired.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Device Overview  
3
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
The device has multiple communication interfaces: three MibSPIs; two SPIs; two SCIs, one of which can  
be used as LIN; up to three DCANs; and one I2C module. The SPI provides a convenient method of serial  
interaction for high-speed communications between similar shift-register type devices. The LIN supports  
the Local Interconnect standard 2.0 and can be used as a UART in full-duplex mode using the standard  
Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) format. The DCAN supports the CAN 2.0B protocol standard and uses a serial,  
multimaster communication protocol that efficiently supports distributed real-time control with robust  
communication rates of up to 1 Mbps. The DCAN is ideal for applications operating in noisy and harsh  
environments (for example, automotive and industrial fields) that require reliable serial communication or  
multiplexed wiring.  
The I2C module is a multimaster communication module providing an interface between the  
microcontroller and an I2C-compatible device through the I2C serial bus. The I2C module supports speeds  
of 100 and 400 kbps.  
A Frequency-Modulated Phase-Locked Loop (FMPLL) clock module is used to multiply the external  
frequency reference to a higher frequency for internal use. The FMPLL provides one of the six possible  
clock source inputs to the Global Clock Module (GCM). The GCM manages the mapping between the  
available clock sources and the device clock domains.  
The device also has an external clock prescaler (ECP) circuit that when enabled, outputs a continuous  
external clock on the ECLK terminal. The ECLK frequency is a user-programmable ratio of the peripheral  
interface clock (VCLK) frequency. This low-frequency output can be monitored externally as an indicator of  
the device operating frequency.  
The Direct Memory Access (DMA) controller has 16 channels, 32 peripheral requests,  
and parity protection on its memory. An MPU is built into the DMA to protect memory against erroneous  
transfers.  
The Error Signaling Module (ESM) monitors device errors and determines whether an interrupt or external  
error signal (nERROR) is asserted when a fault is detected. The nERROR terminal can be monitored  
externally as an indicator of a fault condition in the microcontroller.  
With integrated functional safety features and a wide choice of communication and control peripherals, the  
TMS570LS0714 device is an ideal solution for high-performance, real-time control applications with safety-  
critical requirements.  
Device Information(1)  
PART NUMBER  
TMS570LS0714PGE  
TMS570LS0714PZ  
PACKAGE  
LQFP (144)  
LQFP (100)  
BODY SIZE  
20.0 mm × 20.0 mm  
14.0 mm × 14.0 mm  
(1) For more information, see Section 10, Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information.  
4
Device Overview  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
1.4 Functional Block Diagram  
Figure 1-1 shows the functional block diagram of the device.  
NOTE: The block diagram reflects the 144PGE package. Some functions are multiplexed or not available  
in other packages. For details, see the respective terminal functions table in Section 4.2, Terminal  
Functions.  
128KBRAM  
with ECC  
768KB  
Flash  
with  
32K  
32K  
32K  
32K  
ECC  
DMA  
HTU1  
HTU2  
Dual Cortex-R4F  
CPUs in Lockstep  
Switched Central Resource Switched Central Resource  
Main Cross Bar: Arbitration and Prioritization Control  
Switched Central Resource  
Peripheral Central Resource Bridge  
CRC  
nPORRST  
SYS  
nRST  
ECLK  
eQEPxA  
IOMM  
eQEP  
64KB Flash  
eQEPxB  
nERROR  
1,2  
eQEPxS  
eQEPxI  
ESM  
for EEPROM  
Emulation  
with ECC  
PMM  
VIM  
CAN1_RX  
CAN1_TX  
CAN2_RX  
CAN2_TX  
DCAN1  
eCAP  
1..6  
eCAP[6:1]  
DCAN2  
DCAN3  
CAN3_RX  
CAN3_TX  
nTZ[3:1]  
SYNCO  
SYNCI  
ePWM  
1..7  
MIBSPI1_CLK  
MIBSPI1_SIMO[1:0]  
MIBSPI1_SOMI[1:0]  
ePWMxA  
ePWMxB  
MibSPI1  
SPI2  
RTI  
MIBSPI1_nCS[5:0]  
MIBSPI1_nENA  
SPI2_CLK  
SPI2_SIMO  
SPI2_SOMI  
Color Legend for Power Domains  
Core/RAM  
DCC1  
Core  
RAM  
SPI2_nCS[1:0]  
SPI2_nENA  
always on  
# 1  
# 2  
# 3  
# 5  
# 1  
MIBSPI3_CLK  
MIBSPI3_SIMO  
MIBSPI3_SOMI  
MIBSPI3_nCS[5:0]  
MIBSPI3_nENA  
MibSPI3  
SPI4  
DCC2  
I2C  
SPI4_CLK  
SPI4_SIMO  
SPI4_SOMI  
SPI4_nCS0  
SPI4_nENA  
MibADC1  
MibADC2 N2HET1 N2HET2  
GIO  
MIBSPI5_SIMO[3:0]  
MIBSPI5_SOMI[3:0]  
MIBSPI5_nCS[3:0]  
MIBSPI5_nENA  
MibSPI5  
LIN_RX  
LIN_TX  
LIN  
SCI  
SCI_RX  
SCI_TX  
Figure 1-1. Functional Block Diagram  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Device Overview  
5
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table of Contents  
1
Device Overview ......................................... 1  
1.1 Features .............................................. 1  
1.2 Applications........................................... 2  
1.3 Description............................................ 3  
1.4 Functional Block Diagram ............................ 5  
Revision History ......................................... 7  
Device Comparison ..................................... 8  
3.1 Related Products ..................................... 8  
Terminal Configuration and Functions.............. 9  
4.1 Pin Diagrams ......................................... 9  
4.2 Signal Descriptions ................................. 11  
4.3 Pin Multiplexing...................................... 29  
4.4 Buffer Type.......................................... 35  
Specifications .......................................... 36  
5.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings......................... 36  
5.2 ESD Ratings ........................................ 36  
5.3 Power-On Hours (POH)............................. 36  
5.4 Recommended Operating Conditions............... 37  
6.14 Vectored Interrupt Manager ......................... 73  
6.15 DMA Controller ...................................... 76  
6.16 Real-Time Interrupt Module ......................... 78  
6.17 Error Signaling Module.............................. 80  
6.18 Reset/Abort/Error Sources .......................... 84  
6.19 Digital Windowed Watchdog ........................ 87  
6.20 Debug Subsystem................................... 88  
2
3
7
Peripheral Information and Electrical  
Specifications ........................................... 93  
4
7.1 I/O Timings ......................................... 93  
7.2 Enhanced PWM Modules (ePWM).................. 96  
7.3 Enhanced Capture Modules (eCAP)............... 102  
7.4  
Enhanced Quadrature Encoder (eQEP) ........... 105  
12-Bit Multibuffered Analog-to-Digital Converter  
7.5  
5
(MibADC)........................................... 108  
7.6 General-Purpose Input/Output..................... 121  
7.7 Enhanced High-End Timer (N2HET) .............. 122  
7.8 Controller Area Network (DCAN) .................. 126  
7.9  
Local Interconnect Network Interface (LIN)........ 127  
5.5  
Input/Output Electrical Characteristics Over  
7.10 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) ............. 128  
Recommended Operating Conditions............... 38  
Power Consumption Over Recommended  
7.11 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Module .............. 129  
5.6  
Operating Conditions................................ 39  
5.7 Thermal Resistance Characteristics ................ 40  
5.8 Timing and Switching Characteristics............... 41  
System Information and Electrical  
Specifications ........................................... 43  
7.12 Multibuffered / Standard Serial Peripheral  
Interface............................................ 132  
8
9
Applications, Implementation, and Layout ...... 144  
8.1 TI Designs or Reference Designs ................. 144  
Device and Documentation Support.............. 145  
9.1 Getting Started and Next Steps ................... 145  
6
6.1 Device Power Domains ............................. 43  
6.2 Voltage Monitor Characteristics ..................... 43  
9.2  
Device and Development-Support Tool  
Nomenclature ...................................... 145  
6.3  
Power Sequencing and Power-On Reset ........... 44  
9.3 Tools and Software ................................ 147  
9.4 Documentation Support............................ 149  
9.5 Community Resources............................. 149  
9.6 Trademarks ........................................ 149  
9.7 Electrostatic Discharge Caution ................... 150  
9.8 Glossary............................................ 150  
9.9 Device Identification................................ 151  
9.10 Module Certifications............................... 152  
6.4 Warm Reset (nRST)................................. 46  
6.5 ARM Cortex-R4F CPU Information ................. 47  
6.6 Clocks ............................................... 51  
6.7 Clock Monitoring .................................... 58  
6.8 Glitch Filters......................................... 60  
6.9 Device Memory Map ................................ 61  
6.10 Flash Memory ....................................... 66  
6.11 Tightly Coupled RAM Interface Module ............. 69  
6.12 Parity Protection for Accesses to Peripheral RAMs 69  
6.13 On-Chip SRAM Initialization and Testing ........... 71  
10 Mechanical Packaging and Orderable  
Information............................................. 157  
10.1 Packaging Information ............................. 157  
6
Table of Contents  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
2 Revision History  
NOTE: Page numbers for previous revisions may differ from page numbers in the current version.  
This data manual revision history highlights the technical changes made to the SPNS226D device-specific  
data manual to make it an SPNS226E revision.  
Scope: Applicable updates to the TMS570LS0714 device family, specifically relating to the  
TMS570LS0714 devices (Silicon Revision A), which are now in the production data (PD) stage of  
development have been incorporated.  
Changes from September 15, 2015 to November 1, 2016 (from D Revision (September 2015) to E Revision)  
Page  
GLOBAL: PZ package is now fully qualified ...................................................................................... 1  
Section 1.1 (Features): Updated/Changed the GIO pin count in GIO bullet .................................................. 1  
Section 1.1: Updated/Changed the SPI features bullet.......................................................................... 1  
Section 3.1 (Related Products): Added new section. ............................................................................ 8  
Section 4.2 (Signal Descriptions): Updated/Changed reference to Technical Reference Manual ....................... 11  
Table 4-2 (PGE Enhanced High-End Timer Modules (N2HET)): Added a description for pins 14 and 55  
(N2HET1_PIN_nDIS and N2HET2_PIN_nDIS, respectively).................................................................. 13  
Table 4-20 (PZ Enhanced High-End Timer Modules (N2HET)): Added Pin 10, GIOA[5] / INT[5] / EXTCLKIN  
/EPWM1A/N2HET1_PIN_nDIS.................................................................................................... 22  
Table 6-20 (Device Memory Map): Updated/Changed the FRAME SIZE column value for "Flash Data Space  
ECC" under Flash Module Bus2 Interface from "768KB" to "1MB". .......................................................... 62  
Section 6.19 (Digital Windowed Watchdog): Added Figure 6-13, Digital Windowed Watchdog Example............... 87  
Table 7-11 (eCAPx Clock Enable Control): Updated/Changed "ePWM" to "eCAP" in MODULE INSTANCE  
column............................................................................................................................... 103  
Table 7-15 (eQEPx Clock Enable Control): Updated/Changed "ePWM" to "eQEP" in MODULE INSTANCE  
column............................................................................................................................... 106  
Table 7-20 (MibADC1 Trigger Event Hookup): Added lead-in paragraph referencing the table ........................ 108  
Table 7-21 (MibADC2 Event Trigger Hookup): Added lead-in paragraph referencing the table ........................ 110  
Figure 7-11 (ePWM1SOC1A Switch Implementation): Added missing ePWM1 SOC1A detailed switch  
connection example and lead-in reference sentence ......................................................................... 114  
Section 9.1 (Getting Started and Next Steps): Added new section ......................................................... 145  
Section 9.2 (Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature): Moved subsection after "Getting Started  
and Next Steps" subsection (new) .............................................................................................. 145  
Section 9.9.1 Added the address of the Device ID register. ................................................................. 151  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Revision History  
7
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
3 Device Comparison  
Table 3-1 lists the features of the TMS570LS0714 devices.  
Table 3-1. TMS570LS0714 Device Comparison  
FEATURES  
Generic Part Number  
Package  
TMS570LS DEVICES  
3137ZWT(1)  
337 BGA  
ARM Cortex-R4F  
180  
1227ZWT(1)  
337 BGA  
ARM Cortex-R4F  
180  
0914PGE(1)  
0714PGE  
144 QFP  
ARM Cortex-R4F  
160  
0714PZ  
100 QFP  
ARM Cortex-R4F  
100  
0432PZ  
144 QFP  
100 QFP  
CPU  
ARM Cortex-R4F  
ARM Cortex-R4  
Frequency (MHz)  
Flash (KB)  
160  
1024  
128  
80  
384  
32  
3072  
1280  
768  
768  
RAM (KB)  
256  
192  
128  
128  
Data Flash [EEPROM]  
(KB)  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
16  
EMAC  
FlexRay  
CAN  
10/100  
2-ch  
3
10/100  
2-ch  
3
3
3
2
2
MibADC  
12-bit (Ch)  
2 x (24ch)  
2 x (24ch)  
2 x (24ch)  
2 x (24ch)  
2 x (16ch)  
1 x (16ch)  
N2HET (Ch)  
ePWM Channels  
eCAP Channels  
eQEP Channels  
MibSPI (CS)  
SPI (CS)  
2 (44)  
2 (44)  
2 (40)  
2 (40)  
2 (21)  
1 (19)  
14  
14  
14  
8
6
6
6
4
0
2
2
3 (5 + 6 + 1)  
1 (1)  
2
3 (5 + 6 + 4)  
1 (1)  
1
2 (5 + 1)  
1 (1)  
2
3 (6 + 6 + 4)  
2 (2 + 1)  
2 (1 with LIN)  
1
3 (6 + 6 + 4)  
2 (2 + 1)  
2 (1 with LIN)  
1
1 (4)  
2
SCI (LIN)  
2 (1 with LIN)  
1
2 (1 with LIN)  
1
1 (with LIN)  
1 (with LIN)  
I2C  
120 (with 16 interrupt  
capable)  
101 (with 16 interrupt  
capable)  
64 (with 10 interrupt  
capable)  
64 (with 10 interrupt  
capable)  
45 (with 9 interrupt  
capable)  
45 (with 8 interrupt  
capable)  
GPIO (INT)  
EMIF  
16-bit data  
32-bit  
16-bit data  
ETM (Trace)  
RTP/DMM  
YES  
Operating  
Temperature  
-40ºC to 125ºC  
-40ºC to 125ºC  
-40ºC to 125ºC  
-40ºC to 125ºC  
-40ºC to 125ºC  
-40ºC to 125ºC  
Core Supply (V)  
I/O Supply (V)  
1.14 V – 1.32 V  
3.0 V – 3.6 V  
1.14 V – 1.32 V  
3.0 V – 3.6 V  
1.14 V – 1.32 V  
3.0 V – 3.6 V  
1.14 V – 1.32 V  
3.0 V – 3.6 V  
1.14 V – 1.32 V  
3.0 V – 3.6 V  
1.14 V – 1.32 V  
3.0 V – 3.6 V  
(1) Bolding denotes a superset device. For additional device variants, see www.ti.com/tms570  
3.1 Related Products  
For information about other devices in this family of products or related products, see the following links.  
Products for TMS570 16-Bit and 32-Bit MCUs  
An expansive portfolio of software and pin-compatible high-performance ARM® Cortex®-R-based MCU  
products from 80 MHz up to 300 MHz with on-chip features that prove a high level of diagnostic coverage,  
as well as provide scalability to address a wide range of applications.  
Companion Products for TMS570LS0714  
Review products that are frequently purchased or used with this product.  
8
Device Comparison  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4 Terminal Configuration and Functions  
4.1 Pin Diagrams  
4.1.1 PGE QFP Package Pinout (144-Pin)  
AD1IN[10] / AD2IN[10]  
AD1IN[01]  
AD1IN[09] / AD2IN[09]  
VCCAD  
VSSAD  
ADREFLO  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
72  
71  
70  
69  
68  
67  
66  
65  
64  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
nTRST  
TDI  
TDO  
TCK  
RTCK  
VCC  
ADREFHI  
VSS  
nRST  
nERROR  
N2HET1[10]  
ECLK  
AD1IN[21] / AD2IN[05]  
AD1IN[20] / AD2IN[04]  
AD1IN[19] / AD2IN[03]  
AD1IN[18] / AD2IN[02]  
AD1IN[07]  
AD1IN[0]  
AD1IN[17] / AD2IN[01]  
AD1IN[16] / AD2IN[0]  
VCC  
VCCIO  
VSS  
VSS  
VCC  
N2HET1[12]  
N2HET1[14]  
GIOB[0]  
N2HET1[30]  
CAN2TX  
VSS  
MIBSPI3NCS[0]  
MIBSPI3NENA  
MIBSPI3CLK  
MIBSPI3SIMO  
MIBSPI3SOMI  
VSS  
VCC  
VCC  
VSS  
nPORRST  
VCC  
VSS  
VSS  
VCCIO  
N2HET1[15]  
MIBSPI1NCS[2]  
N2HET1[13]  
N2HET1[06]  
MIBSPI3NCS[1]  
CAN2RX  
MIBSPI1NCS[1]  
LINRX  
LINTX  
GIOB[1]  
VCCP  
VSS  
VCCIO  
VCC  
VSS  
N2HET1[16]  
N2HET1[18]  
N2HET1[20]  
GIOB[2]  
VCC  
VSS  
A. Pins can have multiplexed functions. Only the default function is shown in Figure 4-1.  
Figure 4-1. PGE QFP Package Pinout (144-Pin)  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
9
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
4.1.2 PZ QFP Package Pinout (100-Pin)  
50  
49  
AD1IN[10]  
AD1IN[1]  
AD1IN[9]  
76  
nTRST  
77  
TDI  
48  
47  
78  
TDO  
VSSAD/ADREFLO  
VCCAD/ADREFHI  
AD1IN[21]  
79  
TCK  
RTCK  
46  
45  
80  
81  
nRST  
44  
AD1IN[20]  
82  
nERROR  
N2HET1[10]  
43  
42  
AD1IN[7]  
83  
AD1IN[0]  
84  
ECLK  
VCCIO  
VSS  
41  
40  
39  
AD1IN[17]  
85  
86  
87  
AD1IN[16]  
MIBSPI1nCS[3]  
MIBSPI3nCS[0]  
VSS  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
VCC  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
MIBSPI3nENA  
MIBSPI3CLK  
N2HET1[12]  
N2HET1[14]  
CAN2TX  
MIBSPI3SIMO  
MIBSPI3SOMI  
CAN2RX  
MIBSPI1nCS[1]  
VSS  
VCC  
LINRX  
LINTX  
nPORRST  
VCC  
VCCP  
VSS  
N2HET1[16]  
N2HET1[18]  
VCC  
VCCIO  
MIBSPI1nCS[2]  
N2HET1[6]  
VSS  
Figure 4-2. PZ QFP Package Pinout (100-Pin)  
10  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4.2 Signal Descriptions  
The signal descriptions section shows pin information in module function order per package.  
Section 4.2.1 and Section 4.2.2 identify the external signal names, the associated pin or ball numbers  
along with the mechanical package designator, the pin or ball type (Input, Output, I/O, Power, or Ground),  
whether the pin or ball has any internal pullup/pulldown, whether the pin or ball can be configured as a  
GIO, and a functional pin or ball description. The first signal name listed is the primary function for that  
terminal (pin or ball). The signal name in Bold is the function being described. For information on how to  
select between different multiplexed functions, see Section 4.3, Pin Multiplexing or see the I/O Multiplexing  
and Control Module (IOMM) chapter of the TMS570LS09x/07x 16/32-Bit RISC Flash Microcontroller  
Technical Reference Manual (SPNU607).  
NOTE  
All I/O signals except nRST are configured as inputs while nPORRST is low and immediately  
after nPORRST goes high.  
All output-only signals are configured as high impedance while nPORRST is low, and are  
configured as outputs immediately after nPORRST goes high.  
While nPORRST is low, the input buffers are disabled, and the output buffers are high  
impedance.  
In the Terminal Functions tables of Section 4.2.1 and Section 4.2.2, the RESET PULL  
STATE is the state of the pullup or pulldown while nPORRST is low and immediately after  
nPORRST goes high. The default pull direction may change when software configures the  
pin for an alternate function. The PULL TYPE is the type of pull asserted when the signal  
name in bold is enabled for the given terminal.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
11  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
4.2.1 PGE Package Terminal Functions  
4.2.1.1 Multibuffered Analog-to-Digital Converters (MibADCs)  
Table 4-1. PGE Multibuffered Analog-to-Digital Converters (MibADC1, MibADC2)  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
ADREFHI(1)  
66  
Power  
None  
ADC high reference  
supply  
ADREFLO(1)  
VCCAD(1)  
VSSAD(1)  
AD1EVT  
67  
69  
68  
86  
Power  
Power  
Ground  
I/O  
ADC low reference supply  
Operating supply for ADC  
Pulldown Programmable, ADC1 event trigger input,  
20 µA or GIO  
MIBSPI3NCS[0]/AD2EVT/GIOB[2]/  
55  
I/O  
Pullup  
Programmable, ADC2 event trigger input,  
EQEP1I/N2HET2_PIN_nDIS  
20 µA  
or GIO  
AD1IN[0]  
60  
71  
73  
74  
76  
78  
80  
61  
83  
70  
72  
75  
77  
79  
82  
85  
58  
59  
62  
63  
64  
65  
81  
84  
51  
Input  
None  
ADC1 analog input  
AD1IN[01]  
AD1IN[02]  
AD1IN[03]  
AD1IN[04]  
AD1IN[05]  
AD1IN[06]  
AD1IN[07]  
AD1IN[08] / AD2IN[08]  
AD1IN[09] / AD2IN[09]  
AD1IN[10] / AD2IN[10]  
AD1IN[11] / AD2IN[11]  
AD1IN[12] / AD2IN[12]  
AD1IN[13] / AD2IN[13]  
AD1IN[14] / AD2IN[14]  
AD1IN[15] / AD2IN[15]  
AD1IN[16] / AD2IN[0]  
AD1IN[17] / AD2IN[01]  
AD1IN[18] / AD2IN[02]  
AD1IN[19] / AD2IN[03]  
AD1IN[20] / AD2IN[04]  
AD1IN[21] / AD2IN[05]  
AD1IN[22] / AD2IN[06]  
AD1IN[23] / AD2IN[07]  
MIBSPI3SOMI[0]/AWM1_EXT_ENA/ECAP2  
Input  
None  
ADC1/ADC2 shared  
analog inputs  
Output  
Output  
Output  
Pullup  
Pullup  
Pullup  
AWM1 external analog  
mux enable  
MIBSPI3SIMO[0]/AWM1_EXT_SEL[0]/ECAP3  
MIBSPI3CLK/AWM1_EXT_SEL[1]/EQEP1A  
52  
53  
AWM1 external analog  
mux select line0  
AWM1 external analog  
mux select line0  
(1) The ADREFHI, ADREFLO, VCCAD and VSSAD connections are common for both ADC cores.  
12  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4.2.1.2 Enhanced High-End Timer (N2HET) Modules  
Table 4-2. PGE Enhanced High-End Timer (N2HET) Modules  
TERMINAL  
DESCRIPTION  
RESET  
PULL  
STATE  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
PULL TYPE  
144  
SIGNAL NAME  
PGE  
N2HET1[0]/SPI4CLK/EPWM2B  
N2HET1[01]/SPI4NENA/N2HET2[8]/EQEP2A  
N2HET1[02]/SPI4SIMO[0]/EPWM3A  
N2HET1[03]/SPI4NCS[0]/N2HET2[10]/EQEP2B  
N2HET1[04]/EPWM4B  
25  
23  
30  
24  
36  
N2HET1[05]/SPI4SOMI[0]/N2HET2[12]/EPWM3B  
N2HET1[06]/SCIRX/EPWM5A  
N2HET1[07]/N2HET2[14]/EPWM7B  
N2HET1[08]/MIBSPI1SIMO[1]/  
N2HET1[09]/N2HET2[16]/EPWM7A  
N2HET1[10]/nTZ3  
31  
38  
33  
106  
35  
Pulldown  
118  
6
N2HET1[11]/MIBSPI3NCS[4]/N2HET2[18]/EPWM1SYNCO  
N2HET1[12]  
124  
39  
N2HET1[13]/SCITX/EPWM5B  
N2HET1[14]  
N2HET1 timer input  
capture  
or  
output  
125  
41  
compare, or GIO.  
N2HET1[15]/MIBSPI1NCS[4]/ECAP1  
N2HET1[16]/EPWM1SYNCI/EPWM1SYNCO  
MIBSPI1NCS[1]/N2HET1[17]/EQEP1S  
N2HET1[18]/EPWM6A  
Programmable,  
20 µA  
I/O  
Each terminal has  
suppression filter with a  
programmable duration.  
a
139  
130  
140  
40  
Pullup  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
MIBSPI1NCS[2]/N2HET1[19]  
N2HET1[20]/EPWM6B  
141  
15  
Pulldown  
N2HET1[22]  
MIBSPI1NENA/N2HET1[23]/ECAP4  
N2HET1[24]/MIBSPI1NCS[5]  
MIBSPI3NCS[1]/N2HET1[25]  
N2HET1[26]  
96  
Pullup  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
91  
37  
92  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
MIBSPI3NCS[2]/I2CSDA/N2HET1[27]/nTZ2  
N2HET1[28]  
4
107  
3
Pulldown  
Pullup  
MIBSPI3NCS[3]/I2CSCL/N2HET1[29]/nTZ1  
N2HET1[30]/EQEP2S  
127  
54  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
MIBSPI3NENA/MIBSPI3NCS[5]/N2HET1[31]/EQEP1B  
Disable selected PWM  
outputs  
GIOA[5]/EXTCLKIN1/EPWM1A/N2HET1_PIN_nDIS  
14  
Pulldown  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
GIOA[2]/N2HET2[0]/EQEP2I  
9
GIOA[6]/N2HET2[4]/EPWM1B  
16  
22  
23  
24  
31  
33  
35  
6
GIOA[7]/N2HET2[6]EPWM2A  
N2HET2 timer input  
capture  
or  
output  
N2HET1[01]/SPI4NENA//N2HET2[8]  
N2HET1[03]/SPI4NCS[0]/N2HET2[10]/EQEP2B  
N2HET1[05]/SPI4SOMI[0]/N2HET2[12]/EQEP3B  
N2HET1[07]/N2HET2[14]/EPWM7B  
N2HET1[09]/N2HET2[16]  
compare, or GIO  
Programmable,  
20 µA  
I/O  
Each terminal has  
suppression filter with a  
programmable duration.  
a
N2HET1[11]/MIBSPI3NCS[4]/N2HET2[18]/EPWM1SYNCO  
Disable selected PWM  
outputs  
MIBSPI3NCS[0]/AD2EVT/GIOB[2]/EQEP1l/N2HET2_PIN_nDIS  
55  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
13  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
4.2.1.3 Enhanced Capture Modules (eCAP)  
Table 4-3. PGE Enhanced Capture Modules (eCAP)(1)  
TERMINAL  
RESET  
PULL  
STATE  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
PULL TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
144  
PGE  
SIGNAL NAME  
Enhanced Capture Module 1  
I/O  
N2HET1[15]/MIBSPI1NCS[4]/ECAP1  
41  
51  
Pulldown  
Enhanced Capture Module 2  
I/O  
MIBSPI3SOMI[0]/AWM1_EXT_ENA/ECAP2  
MIBSPI3SIMO[0]/AWM1_EXT_SEL[0]/ECAP3  
MIBSPI1NENA/N2HET1[23]/ECAP4  
Enhanced Capture Module 3  
I/O  
52  
I/O  
Fixed, 20 µA  
Enhanced Capture Module 4  
I/O  
96  
Pullup  
Enhanced Capture Module 5  
I/O  
MIBSPI5NENA/MIBSPI5SOMI[1]/ECAP5  
MIBSPI1NCS[0]/MIBSPI1SOMI[1]/ECAP6  
97  
Enhanced Capture Module 6  
I/O  
105  
(1) These signals, when used as inputs, are double-synchronized and then optionally filtered with a 6-cycle VCLK4-based counter.  
4.2.1.4 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse Modules (eQEP)  
Table 4-4. PGE Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse Modules (eQEP)(1)  
TERMINAL  
RESET  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
PULL  
STATE  
PULL TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
144  
PGE  
SIGNAL NAME  
MIBSPI3CLK/AWM1_EXT_SEL[1]/EQEP1A  
MIBSPI3NENA/MIBSPI3NCS[5]/N2HET1[31]/EQEP1B  
MIBSPI3NCS[0]/AD2EVT/GIOB[2]/EQEP1I/N2HET2_PIN_nDIS  
MIBSPI1NCS[1]/N2HET1[17]//EQEP1S  
N2HET1[01]/SPI4NENA/N2HET2[8]/EQEP2A  
N2HET1[03]/SPI4NCS[0]/N2HET2[10]/EQEP2B  
GIOA[2]/N2HET2[0]/EQEP2I  
53  
54  
55  
130  
23  
24  
9
Input  
Input  
I/O  
Enhanced QEP1 Input A  
Enhanced QEP1 Input B  
Enhanced QEP1 Index  
Enhanced QEP1 Strobe  
Enhanced QEP2 Input A  
Enhanced QEP2 Input B  
Enhanced QEP2 Index  
Enhanced QEP2 Strobe  
Pullup  
I/O  
Fixed, 20 µA  
Input  
Input  
I/O  
Pulldown  
N2HET1[30]/EQEP2S  
127  
I/O  
(1) These signals are double-synchronized and then optionally filtered with a 6-cycle VCLK4-based counter.  
14  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4.2.1.5 Enhanced Pulse-Width Modulator Modules (ePWM)  
Table 4-5. PGE Enhanced Pulse-Width Modulator Modules (ePWM)  
TERMINAL  
RESET  
PULL  
STATE  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
PULL TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
144  
PGE  
SIGNAL NAME  
GIOA[5]/EXTCLKIN1/EPWM1A/N2HET1_PIN_nDIS  
GIOA[6]/N2HET2[4]/EPWM1B  
14  
16  
Enhanced PWM1 Output A  
Enhanced PWM1 Output B  
Output  
Input  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
External ePWM Sync Pulse  
Output  
N2HET1[11]/MIBSPI3NCS[4]/N2HET2[18]/EPWM1SYNCO  
N2HET1[16]/EPWM1SYNCI/EPWM1SYNCO  
6
External ePWM Sync Pulse  
Output  
139  
Fixed, 20 µA  
GIOA[7]/N2HET2[6]/EPWM2A  
N2HET1[0]/SPI4CLK/EPWM2B  
N2HET1[02]/SPI4SIMO[0]/EPWM3A  
N2HET1[05]/SPI4SOMI[0]/N2HET2[12]/EPWM3B  
MIBSPI5NCS[0]/EPWM4A  
22  
25  
30  
31  
32  
36  
38  
39  
140  
141  
35  
33  
3
Enhanced PWM2 Output A  
Enhanced PWM2 Output B  
Enhanced PWM3 Output A  
Enhanced PWM3 Output B  
Enhanced PWM4 Output A  
Enhanced PWM4 Output B  
Enhanced PWM5 Output A  
Enhanced PWM5 Output B  
Enhanced PWM6 Output A  
Enhanced PWM6 Output B  
Enhanced PWM7 Output A  
Enhanced PWM7 Output B  
Output  
Output  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
N2HET1[04]/EPWM4B  
N2HET1[06]/SCIRX/EPWM5A  
N2HET1[13]/SCITX/EPWM5B  
N2HET1[18]/EPWM6A  
Output  
Pulldown  
N2HET1[20]/EPWM6B  
N2HET1[09]/N2HET2[16]/EPWM7A  
N2HET1[07]/N2HET2[14]/EPWM7B  
MIBSPI3NCS[3]/I2CSCL/N2HET1[29]/nTZ1  
MIBSPI3NCS[2]/I2CSDA/N2HET1[27]/nTZ2  
Trip Zone Inputs 1, 2 and 3.  
These signals are either  
connected asynchronously to  
the ePWMx trip zone inputs,  
or double-synchronized with  
VCLK4, or double-  
Pullup  
4
Input  
Fixed, 20 µA  
synchronized and then filtered  
with a 6-cycle VCLK4-based  
counter before connecting to  
the ePWMx trip zone inputs.  
N2HET1[10]/nTZ3  
118  
Pulldown  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
15  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
4.2.1.6 General-Purpose Input/Output (GIO)  
Table 4-6. PGE General-Purpose Input/Output (GIO)  
Terminal  
Signal Name  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
144 PGE  
GIOA[0]  
GIOA[1]  
2
5
GIOA[2]/N2HET2[0]/EQEPII  
9
GIOA[5]/EXTCLKIN1/EPWM1A/N2HET1_PIN_nDIS  
14  
General-purpose I/O.  
All GIO terminals are  
GIOA[6]/N2HET2[4]/EPWM1B  
16  
Pulldown  
Programmable, capable of generating  
GIOA[7]/N2HET2[6]/EPWM2A  
22  
I/O  
20 µA  
interrupts to the CPU  
on rising / falling /  
both edges.  
GIOB[0]  
126  
133  
142  
55(1)  
1
GIOB[1]  
GIOB[2]  
MIBSPI3NCS[0]/AD2EVT/GIOB[2]/EQEP1I/N2HET2_PIN_nDIS  
Pullup  
GIOB[3]  
Pulldown  
(1) GIOB[2] cannot output a level on to pin 55. Only the input functionality is supported so that the application can generate an interrupt  
whenever the N2HET2_PIN_nDIS is asserted (driven low). Also, a pullup is enabled on the input. This is not programmable using the  
GIO module control registers.  
4.2.1.7 Controller Area Network Controllers (DCAN)  
Table 4-7. PGE Controller Area Network Controllers (DCAN)  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
CAN1RX  
CAN1TX  
CAN2RX  
CAN2TX  
CAN3RX  
CAN3TX  
90  
89  
I/O  
Pullup  
Programmable, CAN1 receive, or GIO  
20 µA  
CAN1 transmit, or GIO  
129  
128  
12  
CAN2 receive, or GIO  
CAN2 transmit, or GIO  
CAN3 receive, or GIO  
CAN3 transmit, or GIO  
13  
4.2.1.8 Local Interconnect Network Interface Module (LIN)  
Table 4-8. PGE Local Interconnect Network Interface Module (LIN)  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
LINRX  
LINTX  
131  
132  
I/O  
Pullup  
Programmable, LIN receive, or GIO  
20 µA  
LIN transmit, or GIO  
16  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4.2.1.9 Standard Serial Communication Interface (SCI)  
Table 4-9. PGE Standard Serial Communication Interface (SCI)  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
N2HET1[06]/SCIRX/EPWM5A  
N2HET1[13]/SCITX/EPWM5B  
38  
39  
I/O  
Pulldown Programmable, SCI receive, or GIO  
20 µA  
SCI transmit, or GIO  
4.2.1.10 Inter-Integrated Circuit Interface Module (I2C)  
Table 4-10. PGE Inter-Integrated Circuit Interface Module (I2C)  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
MIBSPI3NCS[2]/I2CSDA/N2HET1[27]/nTZ2  
MIBSPI3NCS[3]/I2CSCL/N2HET1[29]/nTZ1  
4
3
I/O  
Pullup  
Programmable, I2C serial data, or GIO  
20 µA  
I2C serial clock, or GIO  
4.2.1.11 Standard Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)  
Table 4-11. PGE Standard Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
N2HET1[0]/SPI4CLK/EPWM2B  
25  
24  
23  
30  
I/O  
Pulldown Programmable, SPI4 clock, or GIO  
20 µA  
N2HET1[03]/SPI4NCS[0]/N2HET2[10]/EQEP2B  
N2HET1[01]/SPI4NENA/N2HET2[8]/EQEP2A  
N2HET1[02]/SPI4SIMO[0]/EPWM3A  
SPI4 chip select, or GIO  
SPI4 enable, or GIO  
SPI4 slave-input master-  
output, or GIO  
N2HET1[05]/SPI4SOMI[0]/N2HET2[12]/EPWM3B  
31  
SPI4 slave-output master-  
input, or GIO  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
17  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
4.2.1.12 Multibuffered Serial Peripheral Interface Modules (MibSPI)  
Table 4-12. PGE Multibuffered Serial Peripheral Interface Modules (MibSPI)  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
MIBSPI1CLK  
95  
105  
130  
40  
I/O  
Pullup  
Programmable, MibSPI1 clock, or GIO  
20 µA  
MIBSPI1NCS[0]/MIBSPI1SOMI[1]/ECAP6  
MIBSPI1NCS[1]/N2HET1[17]//EQEP1S  
MIBSPI1NCS[2]/N2HET1[19]/  
MibSPI1 chip select, or  
GIO  
N2HET1[15]/MIBSPI1NCS[4]/ECAP1  
N2HET1[24]/MIBSPI1NCS[5]  
41  
Pulldown Programmable, MibSPI1 chip select, or  
20 µA GIO  
91  
MIBSPI1NENA/N2HET1[23]/ECAP4  
MIBSPI1SIMO[0]  
96  
Pullup  
Programmable, MibSPI1 enable, or GIO  
20 µA  
93  
MibSPI1 slave-in master-  
out, or GIO  
N2HET1[08]/MIBSPI1SIMO[1]  
106  
Pulldown Programmable, MibSPI1 slave-in master-  
20 µA out, or GIO  
MIBSPI1SOMI[0]  
94  
105  
53  
Pullup  
Programmable, MibSPI1 slave-out master-  
20 µA in, or GIO  
MIBSPI1NCS[0]/MIBSPI1SOMI[1]/ECAP6  
MIBSPI3CLK/AWM1_EXT_SEL[1]/EQEP1A  
I/O  
Pullup  
Programmable, MibSPI3 clock, or GIO  
20 µA  
MIBSPI3NCS[0]/AD2EVT/GIOB[2]/EQEP1I/N2HET2_PIN_nD  
55  
MibSPI3 chip select, or  
IS  
GIO  
MIBSPI3NCS[1]/N2HET1[25]  
37  
4
MIBSPI3NCS[2]/I2CSDA/N2HET1[27]/nTZ2  
MIBSPI3NCS[3]/I2CSCL/N2HET1[29]/nTZ1  
N2HET1[11]/MIBSPI3NCS[4]/N2HET2[18]/EPWM1SYNCO  
3
6
Pulldown Programmable, MibSPI3 chip select, or  
20 µA GIO  
MIBSPI3NENA /MIBSPI3NCS[5]/N2HET1[31]/EQEP1B  
54  
Pullup  
Programmable, MibSPI3 chip select, or  
20 µA  
GIO  
MIBSPI3NENA/MIBSPI3NCS[5]/N2HET1[31]/EQEP1B  
MIBSPI3SIMO[0]/AWM1_EXT_SEL[0]/ECAP3  
54  
52  
MibSPI3 enable, or GIO  
MibSPI3 slave-in master-  
out, or GIO  
MIBSPI3SOMI[0]/AWM1_EXT_ENA/ECAP2  
51  
MibSPI3 slave-out master-  
in, or GIO  
MIBSPI5CLK  
100  
32  
I/O  
Pullup  
Programmable, MibSPI5 clock, or GIO  
20 µA  
MIBSPI5NCS[0]/EPWM4A  
MibSPI5 chip select, or  
GIO  
MIBSPI5NENA/MIBSPI5SOMI[1]/ECAP5  
MIBSPI5SIMO[0]/MIBSPI5SOMI[2]  
97  
99  
MibSPI5 enable, or GIO  
MibSPI5 slave-in master-  
out, or GIO  
MIBSPI5SOMI[0]  
98  
MibSPI5 slave-out master-  
in, or GIO  
MIBSPI5NENA/MIBSPI5SOMI[1]/ECAP5  
MIBSPI5SIMO[0]/MIBSPI5SOMI[2]  
97  
99  
MibSPI5 SOMI[0], or GIO  
MibSPI5 SOMI[0], or GIO  
18  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4.2.1.13 System Module Interface  
Table 4-13. PGE System Module Interface  
TERMINAL  
RESET  
PULL  
STATE  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
PULL TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
144  
PGE  
SIGNAL NAME  
Power-on reset, cold reset  
External power supply monitor  
circuitry must drive nPORRST  
low when any of the supplies  
to the microcontroller fall out  
of the specified range. This  
terminal has a glitch filter.  
See Section 6.8.  
nPORRST  
46  
Input  
Pulldown  
100 µA  
System reset, warm reset,  
bidirectional.  
The internal circuitry indicates  
any reset condition by driving  
nRST low.  
The external circuitry can  
assert a system reset by  
driving nRST low. To ensure  
that an external reset is not  
arbitrarily generated, TI  
recommends that an external  
pullup resistor is connected to  
this terminal.  
nRST  
116  
I/O  
Pullup  
100 µA  
This terminal has a glitch  
filter. See Section 6.8.  
ESM Error Signal  
nERROR  
117  
I/O  
Pulldown  
20 µA  
Indicates error of high  
severity. See Section 6.8.  
4.2.1.14 Clock Inputs and Outputs  
Table 4-14. PGE Clock Inputs and Outputs  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
OSCIN  
18  
Input  
None  
From external  
crystal/resonator, or  
external clock input  
KELVIN_GND  
OSCOUT  
19  
20  
Input  
Kelvin ground for oscillator  
Output  
To external  
crystal/resonator  
ECLK  
119  
14  
I/O  
Pulldown Programmable, External prescaled clock  
20 µA  
output, or GIO.  
GIOA[5]/EXTCLKIN1/EPWM1A /N2HET1_PIN_nDIS  
Input  
Pulldown  
20 µA  
External clock input #1  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
19  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
4.2.1.15 Test and Debug Modules Interface  
Table 4-15. PGE Test and Debug Modules Interface  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
TEST  
34  
Input  
Pulldown  
Fixed, 100 µA Test enable. This terminal  
must be connected to  
ground directly or via a  
pulldown resistor.  
nTRST  
RTCK  
TCK  
109  
113  
112  
110  
111  
108  
Input  
Output  
Input  
JTAG test hardware reset  
-
None  
JTAG return test clock  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
Fixed, 100 µA JTAG test clock  
JTAG test data in  
TDI  
Input  
TDO  
TMS  
Output  
Input  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
JTAG test data out  
JTAG test select  
4.2.1.16 Flash Supply and Test Pads  
Table 4-16. PGE Flash Supply and Test Pads  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
VCCP  
134  
3.3-V  
Power  
None  
None  
Flash pump supply  
FLTP1  
FLTP2  
7
8
Flash test pads. These  
terminals are reserved for  
TI use only. For proper  
operation these terminals  
must connect only to a  
test pad or not be  
connected at all [no  
connect (NC)].  
4.2.1.17 Supply for Core Logic: 1.2V nominal  
Table 4-17. PGE Supply for Core Logic: 1.2V nominal  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
17  
29  
1.2-V  
Power  
None  
Core supply  
45  
48  
49  
57  
87  
101  
114  
123  
137  
143  
20  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4.2.1.18 Supply for I/O Cells: 3.3V nominal  
Table 4-18. PGE Supply for I/O Cells: 3.3V nominal  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
VCCIO  
VCCIO  
VCCIO  
VCCIO  
VCCIO  
VCCIO  
10  
26  
3.3-V  
Power  
None  
Operating supply for I/Os  
42  
104  
120  
136  
4.2.1.19 Ground Reference for All Supplies Except VCCAD  
Table 4-19. PGE Ground Reference for All Supplies Except VCCAD  
Terminal  
Signal Reset Pull  
Pull Type  
Description  
Type  
State  
Signal Name  
144  
PGE  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
11  
21  
Ground  
None  
Ground reference  
27  
28  
43  
44  
47  
50  
56  
88  
102  
103  
115  
121  
122  
135  
138  
144  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
21  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
4.2.2 PZ Package Terminal Functions  
4.2.2.1 High-End Timer (N2HET) Modules  
Table 4-20. PZ Enhanced High-End Timer (N2HET) Modules  
TERMINAL  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
RESET  
PULL  
STATE  
PULL TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
SIGNAL NAME  
100 PZ  
N2HET1[0]/ SPI4CLK / EPWM2B  
N2HET1[2] / SPI4SIMO / EPWM3A  
N2HET1[4] / EPWM4B  
N2HET1[6] / SCIRX / EPWM5A  
N2HET1[8] / MIBSPI1SIMO[1]  
N2HET1[10] / nTZ3  
19  
22  
25  
26  
74  
83  
89  
90  
97  
I/O  
Pulldown  
Programmable,  
20 µA  
N2HET2 timer input capture or output  
compare, or GIO.  
Each terminal has a suppression filter with a  
programmable duration.  
Timer input capture or output compare. The N2HET  
applicable terminals can be programmed as  
general-purpose input/output (GIO).  
N2HET1[12]  
N2HET1[14]  
N2HET1[16] / EPWM1SYNCI /  
EPWM1SYNCO  
MIBSPI1nCS[1] / N2HET1[17] / EQEP1S  
N2HET1[18] / EPWM6A  
93  
98  
27  
39  
11  
68  
64  
37  
Pullup  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
MIBSPI1nCS[2] / N2HET1[19]  
MIBSPI1nCS[3] / N2HET1[21]  
N2HET1[22]  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
MIBSPI1nENA / N2HET1[23] / ECAP4  
N2HET1[24] / MIBSPI1nCS[5]  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
MIBSPI3nENA / MIBSPI3nCS[5] /  
N2HET1[31] / EQEP1B  
GIOA[5] / INT[5] / EXTCLKIN  
/EPWM1A/N2HET1_PIN_nDIS  
10  
Pulldown  
Pulldown  
Disable selected PWM outputs  
GIOA[2] / INT[2] / N2HET2[0] / EQEP2I  
GIOA[3] / INT[3] / N2HET2[2]  
5
8
N2HET2 timer input capture or output  
compare, or GIO.  
GIOA[6] / INT[6] / N2HET2[4] / EPWM1B  
GIOA[7] / INT[7] / N2HET2[6] / EPWM2A  
12  
18  
Each terminal has a suppression filter with a  
programmable duration.  
Timer input capture or output compare. The N2HET  
applicable terminals can be programmed as  
general-purpose input/output (GIO).  
4.2.2.2 Enhanced Capture Modules (eCAP)  
Table 4-21. PZ Enhanced Capture Modules (eCAP)  
Terminal  
Signal  
Type  
Reset Pull  
State  
Pull Type  
Description  
Signal Name  
100  
PZ  
MIBSPI3SOMI[0] /  
AWM1_EXT_ENA / ECAP2  
34  
35  
68  
73  
I/O  
Pullup  
Fixed, 20 µA  
Enhanced Capture Module 2 I/O  
Enhanced Capture Module 3 I/O  
Enhanced Capture Module 4 I/O  
Enhanced Capture Module 6 I/O  
MIBSPI3SIMO[0] /  
AWM1_EXT_SEL[0] / ECAP3  
MIBSPI1NENA / N2HET1[23] /  
ECAP4  
MIBSPI1NCS[0] /  
MIBSPI1SOMI[1] / ECAP6  
22  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4.2.2.3 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse Modules (eQEP)  
Table 4-22. PZ Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse Modules (eQEP)  
TERMINAL  
RESET  
PULL  
STATE  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
PULL TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
Enhanced QEP1 Input A  
100 PZ  
SIGNAL NAME  
MIBSPI3CLK / AWM1_EXT_SEL[1] /  
36  
I/O  
Pullup  
Fixed, 20 µA  
EQEP1A  
MIBSPI3nENA / MIBSPI3nCS[5] /  
N2HET1[31] / EQEP1B  
37  
38  
93  
5
Enhanced QEP1 Input B  
Enhanced QEP1 Index  
Enhanced QEP1 Strobe  
Enhanced QEP2 Index  
MIBSPI3nCS[0] / AD2EVT / GIOB[2]  
/ EQEP1I/N2HET2_PIN_nDIS  
MIBSPI1nCS[1] / N2HET1[17] /  
EQEP1S  
GIOA[2] / INT[2] / N2HET2[0] /  
Pulldown  
EQEP2I  
4.2.2.4 Enhanced Pulse-Width Modulator Modules (ePWM)  
Table 4-23. PZ Enhanced Pulse-Width Modulator Modules (ePWM)  
TERMINAL  
RESET  
PULL  
STATE  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
PULL TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
Enhanced PWM1 Output A  
SIGNAL NAME  
100 PZ  
GIOA[5] / INT[5] / EXTCLKIN /  
EPWM1A/N2HET1_PIN_nDIS  
10  
Output  
Pulldown  
Pulldown  
Pulldown  
Pulldown  
GIOA[6] / INT[6] / N2HET2[4] /  
EPWM1B  
12  
97  
97  
18  
Enhanced PWM1 Output B  
N2HET1[16] / EPWM1SYNCI /  
EPWM1SYNCO  
Input  
Fixed, 20 µA  
External ePWM Sync Pulse Input  
External ePWM Sync Pulse Output  
Enhanced PWM2 Output A  
N2HET1[16] / EPWM1SYNCI /  
EPWM1SYNCO  
Output  
GIOA[7] / INT[7] / N2HET2[6] /  
EPWM2A  
N2HET1[0] / SPI4CLK / EPWM2B  
N2HET1[2] / SPI4SIMO / EPWM3A  
N2HET1[4] / EPWM4B  
19  
22  
25  
26  
98  
83  
Enhanced PWM2 Output B  
Enhanced PWM3 Output A  
Enhanced PWM4 Output B  
Enhanced PWM5 Output A  
Enhanced PWM6 Output A  
Trip Zone 1 input 3  
N2HET1[6] / SCIRX / EPWM5A  
N2HET1[18] / EPWM6A  
N2HET1[10] / nTZ3  
Input  
Pulldown  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
23  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
4.2.2.5 General-Purpose Input/Output (GIO)  
Table 4-24. PZ General-Purpose Input/Output (GIO)  
Terminal  
Signal  
Type  
Reset Pull  
State  
Pull Type  
Description  
Signal Name  
100  
PZ  
GIOA  
GIOA[0] / INT[0]  
GIOA[1] / INT[1]  
1
2
5
I/O  
Pulldown  
Programmable,  
20 µA  
General-purpose input/output  
All GPIO terminals are capable of generating  
interrupts to the CPU on rising/falling/both edges.  
GIOA[2] / INT[2] / N2HET2[0] /  
EQEP2I  
GIOA[3] / INT[3] / N2HET2[2]  
GIOA[4]/ INT[4]  
8
9
GIOA[5] / INT[5] / EXTCLKIN /  
10  
EPWM1A/ N2HET1_PIN_nDIS  
GIOA[6] / INT[6] / N2HET2[4] /  
EPWM1B  
12  
18  
GIOA[7] / INT[7] / N2HET2[6] /  
EPWM2A  
GIOB  
MIBSPI3nCS[0] / AD2EVT /  
GIOB[2] /  
38  
I/O  
General-purpose input/output  
EQEP1I/N2HET2_PIN_nDIS  
4.2.2.6 Controller Area Network Interface Modules (DCAN1, DCAN2)  
Table 4-25. PZ Controller Area Network Interface Modules (DCAN1, DCAN2)  
Terminal  
Signal  
Type  
Reset Pull  
State  
Pull Type  
Description  
Signal Name  
100  
PZ  
DCAN1  
CAN1RX  
CAN1TX  
63  
62  
I/O  
I/O  
Pullup  
Pullup  
Programmable,  
20 µA  
CAN1 Receive, or general-purpose I/O (GPIO)  
CAN1 Transmit, or GPIO  
DCAN2  
CAN2RX  
CAN2TX  
92  
91  
Programmable,  
20 µA  
CAN2 Receive, or GPIO  
CAN2 Transmit, or GPIO  
24  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4.2.2.7 Standard Serial Peripheral Interfaces (SPI2 and SPI4)  
Table 4-26. PZ Standard Serial Peripheral Interfaces (SPI2 and SPI4)  
Terminal  
Signal Type Reset Pull  
State  
Pull Type  
Description  
Signal Name  
100 PZ  
SPI2  
SPI2CLK  
71  
23  
70  
69  
I/O  
Pullup  
Programmable, 20 µA SPI2 Serial Clock, or GPIO  
SPI2 Chip Select, or GPIO  
SPI2nCS[0]  
SPI2SIMO  
SPI2SOMI  
SPI2 Slave-In-Master-Out, or GPIO  
SPI2 Slave-Out-Master-In, or GPIO  
The drive strengths for the SPI2CLK, SPI2SIMO and SPI2SOMI signals are selected individually by configuring the respective SRS bits of the SPIPC9 register  
fo SPI2.  
SRS = 0 for 8mA drive (fast). This is the default mode as the SRS bits in the SPIPC9 register default to 0.  
SRS = 1 for 2mA drive (slow)  
SPI4  
N2HET1[0] / SPI4CLK / EPWM2B  
N2HET1[2] / SPI4SIMO / EPWM3A  
19  
22  
I/O  
Pulldown  
Programmable, 20 µA SPI2 Serial Clock, or GPIO  
SPI2 Slave-In-Master-Out, or GPIO  
4.2.2.8 Multibuffered Serial Peripheral Interface (MibSPI1 and MibSPI3)  
Table 4-27. PZ Multibuffered Serial Peripheral Interface (MibSPI1 and MibSPI3)  
Terminal  
Signal  
Type  
Reset Pull  
State  
Pull Type  
Description  
Signal Name  
100 PZ  
MibSPI1  
Pullup  
MIBSPI1CLK  
67  
73  
I/O  
Programmable, 20 µA MibSPI1 Serial Clock, or GPIO  
MibSPI1 Chip Select, or GPIO  
MIBSPI1nCS[0]/MIBSPI1SOMI[1]/  
ECAP6  
MIBSPI1nCS[1]/N2HET1[17]/  
93  
EQEP1S  
MIBSPI1nCS[2]/N2HET1[19]  
MIBSPI1nCS[3]/N2HET1[21]  
27  
39  
68  
MIBSPI1nENA/N2HET1[23]/  
MibSPI1 Enable, or GPIO  
ECAP4  
MIBSPI1SIMO[0]  
65  
74  
66  
73  
MibSPI1 Slave-In-Master-Out, or GPIO  
N2HET1[8]/MIBSPI1SIMO[1]  
MIBSPI1SOMI[0]  
MibSPI1 Slave-Out-Master-In, or GPIO  
MIBSPI1nCS[0]/MIBSPI1SOMI[1]/  
ECAP6  
MibSPI3  
Pullup  
MIBSPI3CLK/AWM1_EXT_SEL[1]/  
EQEP1A  
36  
38  
37  
37  
35  
34  
I/O  
Programmable, 20 µA MibSPI3 Serial Clock, or GPIO  
MibSPI3 Chip Select, or GPIO  
MIBSPI3nCS[0]/AD2EVT/GIOB[2]/  
EQEP1I/N2HET2_PIN_nDIS  
MIBSPI3nENA/MIBSPI3nCS[5]/  
N2HET1[31]/EQEP1B  
MIBSPI3nENA/MIBSPI3nCS[5]/  
N2HET1[31]/EQEP1B  
MibSPI3 Enable, or GPIO  
MIBSPI3SIMO[0]/AWM1_EXT_SEL[0]/  
ECAP3  
MibSPI3 Slave-In-Master-Out, or GPIO  
MibSPI3 Slave-Out-Master-In, or GPIO  
MIBSPI3SOMI[0]/AWM1_EXT_ENA/  
ECAP2  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
25  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
4.2.2.9 Local Interconnect Network Controller (LIN)  
Table 4-28. PZ Local Interconnect Network Controller (LIN)  
TERMINAL  
RESET  
PULL  
STATE  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
PULL TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
SIGNAL NAME  
100 PZ  
LINRX  
LINTX  
94  
95  
I/O  
Pullup  
Programmable, 20 µA  
LIN Receive, or GPIO  
LIN Transmit, or GPIO  
4.2.2.10 Multibuffered Analog-to-Digital Converter (MibADC)  
Table 4-29. PZ Multibuffered Analog-to-Digital Converter (MibADC)  
Terminal  
Signal  
Type  
Reset Pull  
State  
Pull Type  
Description  
Signal Name  
100  
PZ  
MibADC1  
AD1EVT  
58  
I/O  
Pulldown  
Programmable,  
20 µA  
ADC1 Event Trigger or GPIO  
Analog Inputs  
AD1IN[0]  
42  
49  
51  
52  
54  
55  
56  
43  
57  
48  
50  
53  
40  
41  
44  
45  
46  
Input  
AD1IN[1]  
AD1IN[2]  
AD1IN[3]  
AD1IN[4]  
AD1IN[5]  
AD1IN[6]  
AD1IN[7]  
AD1IN[8]/AD2IN[8]  
AD1IN[9]/AD2IN[9]  
AD1IN[10]/AD2IN[10]  
AD1IN[11]/AD2IN[11]  
AD1IN[16]/AD2IN[0]  
AD1IN[17]/AD2IN[1]  
AD1IN[20]/AD2IN[4]  
AD1IN[21]/AD2IN[5]  
ADREFHI/VCCAD  
Input/  
Power  
ADC High Reference Level/ADC Operating  
Supply  
ADREFLO/VSSAD  
47  
34  
Input/  
Ground  
ADC Low Reference Level/ADC Supply Ground  
MIBSPI3SOMI[0]/AWM1_EXT_  
AWM external analog mux enable  
ENA/  
ECAP2  
MIBSPI3SIMO[0]/AWM1_EXT_  
SEL[0]/  
ECAP3  
35  
36  
AWM external analog mux select line 0  
AWM external analog mux select line1  
MIBSPI3CLK/AWM1_EXT_SEL  
[1]/  
EQEP1A  
MibADC2  
MIBSPI3nCS[0]/AD2EVT/GIOB[  
2]/  
38  
I/O  
ADC2 Event Trigger or GPIO  
EQEP1I/N2HET2_PIN_nDIS  
26  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4.2.2.11 System Module Interface  
Table 4-30. PZ System Module Interface  
TERMINAL  
RESET  
PULL  
STATE  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
PULL TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
SIGNAL NAME  
100 PZ  
Power-on reset, cold reset External power supply  
monitor circuitry must drive nPORRST low when any of  
the supplies to the microcontroller fall out of the  
specified range. This terminal has a glitch filter. See  
Section 6.8.  
nPORRST  
31  
Input  
Pullup  
100 µA  
The external circuitry can assert a system reset by  
driving nRST low. To ensure that an external reset is not  
arbitrarily generated, TI recommends that an external  
pullup resistor is connected to this terminal. This  
terminal has a glitch filter. See Section 6.8.  
nRST  
81  
82  
I/O  
I/O  
Pullup  
100 µA  
20 µA  
ESM Error Signal. Indicates error of high severity. See  
Section 6.8.  
nERROR  
Pulldown  
4.2.2.12 Clock Inputs and Outputs  
Table 4-31. PZ Clock Inputs and Outputs  
TERMINAL  
RESET  
PULL  
STATE  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
PULL TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
SIGNAL NAME  
100 PZ  
OSCIN  
14  
15  
16  
84  
Input  
Input  
Output  
I/O  
From external crystal/resonator, or external clock input  
Dedicated ground for oscillator  
KELVIN_GND  
OSCOUT  
ECLK  
To external crystal/resonator  
Pulldown  
Programmable, 20 µA External prescaled clock output, or GIO.  
20 µA External Clock In  
GIOA[5]/INT[5]/EXTCLKIN/EPWM1A  
/N2HET1_PIN_nDIS  
10  
Input  
Pulldown  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
27  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
4.2.2.13 Test and Debug Modules Interface  
Table 4-32. PZ Test and Debug Modules Interface  
TERMINAL  
RESET  
PULL  
STATE  
SIGNAL  
TYPE  
PULL TYPE  
DESCRIPTION  
SIGNAL NAME  
100 PZ  
nTRST  
RTCK  
TCK  
76  
80  
79  
77  
78  
75  
Input  
Output  
Input  
I/O  
Pulldown  
Fixed, 100 µA  
JTAG test hardware reset  
JTAG return test clock  
JTAG test clock  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
Pulldown  
Pullup  
Fixed, 100 µA  
Fixed, 100 µA  
Fixed, 100 µA  
Fixed, 100 µA  
TDI  
JTAG test data in  
JTAG test data out  
JTAG test select  
TDO  
TMS  
I/O  
I/O  
Test enable. This terminal must be connected to ground  
directly or via a pulldown resistor.  
TEST  
24  
I/O  
Pulldown  
Fixed, 100 µA  
4.2.2.14 Flash Supply and Test Pads  
Table 4-33. PZ Flash Supply and Test Pads  
Terminal  
Signal  
Type  
Reset Pull  
State  
Pull Type  
Description  
Signal Name  
100  
PZ  
VCCP  
96  
3.3-V  
Power  
Flash external pump voltage (3.3 V). This  
terminal is required for both Flash read and Flash  
program and erase operations.  
FLTP1  
FLTP2  
3
4
Input  
Input  
Flash Test Pins. For proper operation this  
terminal must connect only to a test pad or not be  
connected at all [no connect (NC)].  
The test pad must not be exposed in the final  
product where it might be subjected to an ESD  
event.  
4.2.2.15 Supply for Core Logic: 1.2-V Nominal  
Table 4-34. PZ Supply for Core Logic: 1.2-V Nominal  
Terminal  
Signal  
Type  
Reset Pull  
State  
Pull Type  
Description  
Signal Name  
100  
PZ  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
13  
21  
30  
32  
61  
88  
99  
1.2-V  
Power  
Digital logic and RAM supply  
4.2.2.16 Supply for I/O Cells: 3.3-V Nominal  
Table 4-35. PZ Supply for I/O Cells: 3.3-V Nominal  
Terminal  
Signal  
Type  
Reset Pull  
State  
Pull Type  
Description  
Signal Name  
100  
PZ  
VCCIO  
VCCIO  
VCCIO  
VCCIO  
6
3.3-V  
Power  
I/O Supply  
28  
60  
85  
28  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4.2.2.17 Ground Reference for All Supplies Except VCCAD  
Table 4-36. PZ Ground Reference for All Supplies Except VCCAD  
Terminal  
Signal  
Type  
Reset Pull  
State  
Pull Type  
Description  
Signal Name  
100  
PZ  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
VSS  
7
17  
20  
29  
33  
59  
72  
86  
87  
100  
Ground  
Device Ground Reference. This is a single  
ground reference for all supplies except for the  
ADC Supply.  
4.3 Pin Multiplexing  
This microcontroller has several interfaces and uses extensive multiplexing to bring out the functions as  
required by the target application. The multiplexing is mostly on the output signals. A few inputs are also  
multiplexed to allow the same input signal to be driven in from a selected terminal.  
4.3.1 Output Multiplexing  
Table 4-37 and Table 4-38 show the pin multiplexing control x register (PINMMRx) and the associated bit  
fields that control each pin mux function.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
29  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 4-37. Multiplexing for Outputs on 144-Pin PGE Package(1)  
144-PIN  
PGE  
DEFAULT  
FUNCTION  
CTRL1  
10[0]  
OPTION 2  
CTRL2  
OPTION 3  
CTRL3  
OPTION 4  
CTRL4  
OPTION 5  
CTRL5  
OPTION 6  
CTRL6  
86  
2
AD1EVT  
GIOA[0]  
0[8]  
5
GIOA[1]  
1[0]  
9
GIOA[2]  
2[0]  
N2HET2[0]  
2[3]  
EQEP2I  
2[4]  
14  
16  
22  
126  
133  
1
GIOA[5]  
2[24]  
3[16]  
4[0]  
EXTCLKIN1  
2[25]  
EPWM1A  
2[26]  
GIOA[6]  
N2HET2[4]  
N2HET2[6]  
3[17]  
4[1]  
EPWM1B  
EPWM2A  
3[18]  
4[2]  
GIOA[7]  
GIOB[0]  
18[24]  
21[8]  
0[0]  
GIOB[1]  
GIOB[3]  
105  
130  
40  
96  
53  
55  
37  
4
MIBSPI1NCS[0]  
MIBSPI1NCS[1]  
MIBSPI1NCS[2]  
MIBSPI1NENA  
MIBSPI3CLK  
MIBSPI3NCS[0]  
MIBSPI3NCS[1]  
MIBSPI3NCS[2]  
MIBSPI3NCS[3]  
MIBSPI3NENA  
MIBSPI3SIMO  
MIBSPI3SOMI  
MIBSPI5CLK  
MIBSPI5NCS[0]  
MIBSPI5NENA  
13[24]  
20[16]  
8[8]  
MIBSPI1SOMI[1]  
N2HET1[17]  
13[25]  
20[17]  
8[9]  
ECAP6  
13[28]  
20[20]  
EQEP1S  
N2HET1[19]  
12[16]  
33[24]  
9[16]  
7[8]  
N2HET1[23]  
12[17]  
33[25]  
9[17]  
7[9]  
ECAP4  
12[20]  
AWM1_EXT_SEL[1]  
AD2EVT  
EQEP1A  
GIOB[2]  
33[26]  
9[18]  
EQEP1I  
9[19]  
N2HET1[25]  
0[24]  
0[16]  
9[8]  
I2C_SDA  
0[25]  
0[17]  
9[9]  
N2HET1[27]  
N2HET1[29]  
N2HET1[31]  
ECAP3  
0[26]  
nTZ2  
0[27]  
0[19]  
9[11]  
3
I2C_SCL  
0[18]  
nTZ1  
54  
52  
51  
100  
32  
97  
99  
98  
25  
23  
30  
24  
36  
31  
38  
33  
MIBSPI3NCS[5]  
AWM1_EXT_SEL[0]  
AWM1_EXT_ENA  
9[10]  
EQEP1B  
33[16]  
33[8]  
13[16]  
27[0]  
12[24]  
33[17]  
33[9]  
33[18]  
33[10]  
ECAP2  
EPWM4A  
27[2]  
MIBSPI5SOMI[1]  
MIBSPI5SOMI[2]  
12[28]  
13[12]  
ECAP5  
12[29]  
MIBSPI5SIMO[0] 13[8]  
MIBSPI5SOMI[0] 13[0]  
N2HET1[0]  
N2HET1[01]  
N2HET1[02]  
N2HET1[03]  
N2HET1[04]  
N2HET1[05]  
N2HET1[06]  
N2HET1[07]  
5[0]  
SPI4CLK  
SPI4NENA  
SPI4SIMO  
SPI4NCS[0]  
EPWM4B  
SPI4SOMI  
SCIRX  
5[1]  
EPWM2B  
EPWM3A  
5[2]  
4[16]  
5[8]  
4[17]  
5[9]  
4[19]  
4[27]  
5[19]  
6[3]  
N2HET2[8]  
4[20]  
4[28]  
EQEP2A  
4[21]  
4[29]  
5[10]  
4[24]  
33[0]  
5[16]  
7[16]  
6[0]  
4[25]  
33[1]  
5[17]  
7[17]  
N2HET2[10]  
EQEP2B  
N2HET2[12]  
EPWM5A  
5[18]  
7[18]  
EPWM3B  
N2HET2[14]  
EPWM7B  
6[4]  
30  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 4-37. Multiplexing for Outputs on 144-Pin PGE Package(1) (continued)  
144-PIN  
PGE  
DEFAULT  
FUNCTION  
CTRL1  
14[0]  
OPTION 2  
CTRL2  
14[1]  
OPTION 3  
CTRL3  
OPTION 4  
CTRL4  
OPTION 5  
CTRL5  
OPTION 6  
CTRL6  
106  
35  
N2HET1[08]  
N2HET1[09]  
N2HET1[10]  
N2HET1[11]  
N2HET1[12]  
N2HET1[13]  
N2HET1[14]  
N2HET1[15]  
N2HET1[16]  
N2HET1[18]  
N2HET1[20]  
N2HET1[22]  
N2HET1[24]  
N2HET1[26]  
N2HET1[28]  
N2HET1[30]  
MIBSPI1SIMO[1]  
N2HET2[16]  
6[16]  
17[0]  
1[8]  
6[17]  
EPWM7A  
nTZ3  
6[20]  
17[4]  
118  
6
MIBSPI3NCS[4]  
SCITX  
1[9]  
N2HET2[18]  
1[10]  
EPWM1SYNCO  
1[13]  
124  
39  
17[16]  
8[0]  
8[1]  
EPWM5B  
8[2]  
125  
41  
18[8]  
8[16]  
34[0]  
34[8]  
34[16]  
3[8]  
MIBSPI1NCS[4]  
EPWM1SYNCI  
EPWM6A  
8[17]  
34[1]  
34[9]  
34[17]  
ECAP1  
8[18]  
34[2]  
139  
140  
141  
15  
EPWM1SYNCO  
EPWM6B  
91  
11[24]  
12[0]  
14[8]  
19[8]  
MIBSPI1NCS[5]  
11[25]  
92  
107  
127  
EQEP2S  
19[11]  
(1) The CTRLx columns contain a value of type x[y], which indicates the pin multiplexing control x register (PINMMRx) and the associated bit field [y].  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
31  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 4-38. Multiplexing for Outputs on 100-Pin PZ Package(1)  
100-PIN  
PZ  
DEFAULT  
FUNCTION  
CTRL1  
1[0]  
OPTION 2  
CTRL2  
OPTION 3  
CTRL3  
OPTION 4  
CTRL4  
OPTION 5  
CTRL5  
OPTION 6  
CTRL6  
2
GIOA[1]/INT[1]  
GIOA[2]/INT[2]  
GIOA[5]/INT[5]  
GIOA[6]/INT[6]  
GIOA[7]/INT[7]  
MIBSPI1NCS[0]  
MIBSPI1NCS[1]  
MIBSPI1NCS[2]  
MIBSPI1NENA  
MIBSPI3CLK  
MIBSPI3NCS[0]  
MIBSPI3NENA  
MIBSPI3SIMO[0]  
MIBSPI3SOMI[0]  
N2HET1[0]  
5
2[0]  
N2HET2[0]  
2[3]  
EQEP2I  
2[4]  
10  
12  
18  
73  
93  
27  
68  
36  
38  
37  
35  
34  
19  
22  
25  
26  
74  
83  
97  
98  
64  
2[24]  
3[16]  
4[0]  
EXTCLKIN1  
2[25]  
EPWM1A  
2[26]  
N2HET2[4]  
3[17]  
4[1]  
EPWM1B  
EPWM2A  
3[18]  
4[2]  
N2HET2[6]  
13[24]  
20[16]  
8[8]  
MIBSPI1SOMI[1]  
N2HET1[17]  
N2HET1[19]  
N2HET1[23]  
AWM1_EXT_SEL[1]  
AD2EVT  
13[25]  
20[17]  
8[9]  
ECAP6  
13[28]  
20[20]  
EQEP1S  
12[16]  
33[24]  
9[16]  
9[8]  
12[17]  
33[25]  
9[17]  
9[9]  
ECAP4  
12[20]  
EQEP1A  
GIOB[2]  
33[26]  
9[18]  
9[10]  
33[18]  
33[10]  
5[2]  
EQEP1I  
9[19]  
9[11]  
MIBSPI3NCS[5]  
AWM1_EXT_SEL[0]  
AWM1_EXT_ENA  
SPI4CLK  
N2HET1[31]  
ECAP3  
EQEP1B  
33[16]  
33[8]  
5[0]  
33[17]  
33[9]  
5[1]  
ECAP2  
EPWM2B  
EPWM3A  
N2HET1[02]  
5[8]  
SPI4SIMO  
5[9]  
5[10]  
N2HET1[04]  
33[0]  
7[16]  
14[0]  
17[0]  
34[0]  
34[8]  
11[24]  
EPWM4B  
33[1]  
7[17]  
14[1]  
N2HET1[06]  
SCIRX  
EPWM5A  
7[18]  
34[2]  
N2HET1[08]  
MIBSPI1SIMO[1]  
N2HET1[10]  
nTZ3  
17[4]  
N2HET1[16]  
EPWM1SYNCI  
EPWM6A  
34[1]  
34[9]  
11[25]  
EPWM1SYNCO  
N2HET1[18]  
N2HET1[24]  
MIBSPI1NCS[5]  
(1) The CTRLx columns contain a value of type x[y], which indicates the pin multiplexing control x register (PINMMRx) and the associated bit field [y].  
32  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4.3.2 Multiplexing of Inputs  
Some signals are connected to more than one terminal, the inputs for these signals can come from any of  
the terminals. A multiplexor is implemented to let the application choose the terminal that will be used,  
providing the input signal is from among the available options.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
33  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 4-39. Input Multiplexing and Control for All Packages [144-Pin PGE, and 100-Pin PZ](1)  
INPUT MULTIPLEXOR  
CONTROL  
DEDICATED INPUTS  
MULTIPLEXED INPUTS  
INPUT PATH SELECTED  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
144 PGE  
100 PZ  
144 PGE  
100 PZ  
BIT1  
BIT2  
DEDICATED, IF  
MUXED, IF  
BIT1 = 1(3)  
GIOB[2]  
142  
55  
130  
40  
38  
93  
27  
PINMUX29[16]  
PINMUX20[17]  
PINMUX8[9]  
PINMUX29[16]  
PINMUX24[16]  
PINMUX24[24]  
PINMUX25[0]  
PINMUX25[8]  
PINMUX25[16]  
PINMUX25[24]  
PINMUX26[0]  
PINMUX26[8]  
BIT1 = 0(3)  
N2HET1[17]  
N2HET1[19]  
N2HET1[21]  
N2HET1[23]  
N2HET1[25]  
N2HET1[27]  
N2HET1[29]  
N2HET1[31]  
not(BIT1) or (BIT1 and BIT2) = 1  
not(BIT1) or (BIT1 and BIT2) = 1  
not(BIT1) or (BIT1 and BIT2) = 1  
not(BIT1) or (BIT1 and BIT2) = 1  
not(BIT1) or (BIT1 and BIT2) = 1  
not(BIT1) or (BIT1 and BIT2) = 1  
not(BIT1) or (BIT1 and BIT2) = 1  
not(BIT1) or (BIT1 and BIT2) = 1  
BIT1 and not(BIT2) = 1  
BIT1 and not(BIT2) = 1  
BIT1 and not(BIT2) = 1  
BIT1 and not(BIT2) = 1  
BIT1 and not(BIT2) = 1  
BIT1 and not(BIT2) = 1  
BIT1 and not(BIT2) = 1  
BIT1 and not(BIT2) = 1  
PINMUX9[25]  
PINMUX12[17]  
PINMUX7[9]  
96  
37  
4
68  
PINMUX0[26]  
PINMUX0[18]  
PINMUX9[10]  
3
54  
37  
(1) The default inputs to the modules are from the dedicated input terminals. The application must configure the PINMUX registers as shown in order to select the multiplexed input path, if  
required.  
(2) The SPI4CLK, SPI4SIMO, SPI4SOMI, SPI4nENA and SPI4nCS[0] signals do not have a dedicated signal pad on this device. Therefore, the input multiplexors on these inputs are not  
required. The control registers are still available to maintain compatibility to the emulation device.  
(3) When the muxed input is selected for GIOB[2], the PINMUX9[16] and PINMUX9[17] must be cleared. These bits affect the control over the PULDIS (pull disable) and PSEL (pull select).  
When the multiplexed input path is selected for GIOB[2], the PULDIS is tied to 0 (pull is enabled, cannot be disabled) and the PULSEL is tied to 1 (pull up selected, not programmable).  
34  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
4.4 Buffer Type  
Table 4-40. Output Buffer Drive Strengths  
Low-level Output Current, IOL for VI = VOLmax  
or  
Signals  
High-level Output Current, IOH for VI = VOHmin  
MIBSPI5CLK, MIBSPI5SOMI[0], MIBSPI5SOMI[1], MIBSPI5SOMI[2], MIBSPI5SOMI[3],  
MIBSPI5SIMO[0], MIBSPI5SIMO[1], MIBSPI5SIMO[2], MIBSPI5SIMO[3],  
TMS, TDI, TDO, RTCK,  
SPI4CLK, SPI4SIMO, SPI4SOMI, SPI4NCS[0], SPI4NENA, nERROR,  
N2HET2[1], N2HET2[3], N2HET2[5], N2HET2[7], N2HET2[9], N2HET2[11],  
N2HET2[13], N2HET2[15]  
8mA  
ECAP1, ECAP4, ECAP5, ECAP6  
EQEP1I, EQEP1S, EQEP2I, EQEP2S  
EPWM1A, EPWM1B, EPWM1SYNCO, EPW2A, EPWM2B, EPWM3A, EPWM3B,  
EPWM4A, EPWM4B, EPWM5A, EPWM5B, EPWM6A, EPWM6B, EPWM7A, EPWM7B  
TEST,  
MIBSPI3SOMI, MIBSPI3SIMO, MIBSPI3CLK, MIBSPI1SIMO, MIBSPI1SOMI,  
MIBSPI1CLK,  
4mA  
ECAP2, ECAP3  
nRST  
AD1EVT,  
CAN1RX, CAN1TX, CAN2RX, CAN2TX, CAN3RX, CAN3TX,  
GIOA[0-7], GIOB[0-7],  
2mA zero-dominant  
LINRX, LINTX,  
MIBSPI1NCS[0],  
MIBSPI1NCS[1-3],  
MIBSPI1NENA,  
MIBSPI3NCS[0-3],  
MIBSPI3NENA, MIBSPI5NCS[0-3], MIBSPI5NENA,  
N2HET1[0-31], N2HET2[0], N2HET2[2], N2HET2[4], N2HET2[6], N2HET2[8],  
N2HET2[10], N2HET2[12], N2HET2[14], N2HET2[16], N2HET2[18],  
ECLK,  
selectable 8mA / 2mA  
SPI2CLK, SPI2SIMO, SPI2SOMI  
The default output buffer drive strength is 8mA for these signals.  
Table 4-41. Selectable 8mA/2mA Control  
SIGNAL  
ECLK  
CONTROL BIT  
ADDRESS  
0xFFFF FF78  
0xFFF7 F668  
0xFFF7 F668  
0xFFF7 F668  
8mA (DEFAULT)  
2mA  
SYSPC10[0]  
SPI2PC9[9]  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
SPI2CLK  
SPI2SIMO  
SPI2SOMI  
SPI2PC9[10]  
SPI2PC9[11](1)  
(1) Either SPI2PC9[11] or SPI2PC9[24] can change the output strength of the SPI2SOMI pin. In case of a 32-bit write where these two bits  
differ, SPI2PC9[11] determines the drive strength.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
35  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
5 Specifications  
5.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings(1)  
Over Operating Free-Air Temperature Range  
MIN  
–0.3  
–0.3  
–0.3  
–0.3  
–0.3  
–0.3  
MAX  
1.43  
4.6  
UNIT  
(2)  
VCC  
(2)  
Supply voltage range:  
VCCIO, VCCP  
V
(2)  
VCCAD  
6.25  
4.6  
All input pins, with exception of ADC pins  
ADC input pins  
Input voltage  
V
V
6.25  
4.6  
Output voltage  
All output pins  
IIK (VI < 0 or VI > VCCIO  
All pins, except AD1IN[23:0] or AD2IN[15:0]  
)
–20  
20  
Input clamp current  
IIK (VI < 0 or VI > VCCAD  
AD1IN[23:0] or AD2IN[15:0]  
)
mA  
–10  
–40  
–20  
–40  
–40  
10  
40  
Total  
IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VCCIO  
All pins, except AWM1_EXT_x  
)
20  
Output clamp current  
mA  
°C  
Total  
40  
Operating free-air  
temperature (TA)  
125  
Operating junction  
temperature (TJ)  
–40  
–65  
150  
150  
°C  
°C  
Storage temperature (Tstg  
)
(1) Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings  
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under Recommended Operating  
Conditions is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
(2) Maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. All voltage values are with respect to their associated  
grounds.  
5.2 ESD Ratings  
VALUE  
±2  
UNIT  
Human Body Model (HBM), per AEC Q100-002(1)  
All pins  
kV  
V
±500  
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)  
performance:  
100-pin PZ corner pins (1, 25, 26, 50,  
51, 75, 76, 100)  
V(ESD)  
Charged Device Model (CDM),  
per AEC Q100-011  
±750  
±750  
V
V
144-pin PGE corner pins (1, 36, 37, 72,  
73, 108, 109, 144)  
(1) AEC Q100-002 indicates HBM stressing is done in accordance with the ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC JS001 specification.  
5.3 Power-On Hours (POH)(1)(2)  
JUNCTION  
TEMPERATURE (Tj)  
NOMINAL CVDD VOLTAGE (V)  
LIFETIME POH  
1.2  
105ºC  
100K  
(1) This information is provided solely for your convenience and does not extend or modify the warranty provided under TI's standard terms  
and conditions for TI semiconductor products.  
(2) To avoid significant degradation, the device power-on hours (POH) must be limited to those specified in this table. To convert to  
equivalent POH for a specific temperature profile, see the Calculating Equivalent Power-on-Hours for Hercules Safety MCUs Application  
Report (SPNA207).  
36  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
5.4 Recommended Operating Conditions(1)  
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)  
TEST CONDITIONS  
MIN  
1.14  
3
NOM  
1.2  
MAX UNIT  
VCC  
Digital logic supply voltage (Core)  
Digital logic supply voltage (I/O)  
MibADC supply voltage  
1.32  
3.6  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
VCCIO  
VCCAD  
VCCP  
3.3  
3
5.25  
3.6  
Flash pump supply voltage  
3
3.3  
0
VSS  
Digital logic supply ground  
VSSAD  
VADREFHI  
VADREFLO  
MibADC supply ground  
–0.1  
VSSAD  
VSSAD  
0.1  
VCCAD  
VCCAD  
Analog-to-digital high-voltage reference source  
Analog-to-digital low-voltage reference source  
Maximum positive slew rate for VCCIO, VCCAD and  
VCPP supplies  
VSLEW  
1
V/μs  
Vhys  
VIL  
VIH  
TA  
Input hysteresis  
All inputs  
All inputs  
All inputs  
180  
–0.3  
2
mV  
V
Low-level input voltage  
High-level input voltage  
Operating free-air temperature  
Operating junction temperature(2)  
0.8  
VCCIO + 0.3  
V
–40  
–40  
125 °C  
150 °C  
TJ  
(1) All voltages are with respect to VSS, except VCCAD, which is with respect to VSSAD  
(2) Reliability data is based upon a temperature profile that is equivalent to 100,000 power-on hours at 105°C junction temperature.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
37  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
5.5 Input/Output Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions(1)  
PARAMETER  
TEST CONDITIONS  
IOL = IOLmax  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX UNIT  
0.2VCCIO  
IOL = 50 µA, standard output mode  
0.2  
VOL Low-level output voltage  
V
IOL = 50 µA, low-EMI output mode  
(see Section 7.1.2.1)  
0.2VCCIO  
IOH = IOHmax  
0.8VCCIO  
IOH = 50 µA, standard output mode  
VCCIO - 0.3  
VOH High-level output voltage  
V
IOH = 50 µA, low-EMI output mode  
(see Section 7.1.2.1)  
0.8VCCIO  
–3.5  
VI < VSSIO - 0.3 or  
VI > VCCIO + 0.3  
IIC  
Input clamp current (I/O pins)  
IIH Pulldown 20 µA  
3.5 mA  
VI = VCCIO  
5
40  
40  
195  
–5 µA  
–40  
1
IIH Pulldown 100 µA VI = VCCIO  
II  
Input current (I/O pins)  
IIL Pullup 20 µA  
VI = VSS  
–40  
–195  
–1  
IIL Pullup 100 µA  
All other pins  
VI = VSS  
No pullup or pulldown  
CI  
Input capacitance  
Output capacitance  
2
3
pF  
CO  
pF  
(1) Source currents (out of the device) are negative while sink currents (into the device) are positive.  
38  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
5.6 Power Consumption Over Recommended Operating Conditions  
PARAMETER  
TEST CONDITIONS  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX UNIT  
(1)  
(2)  
VCC digital supply current (operating mode)  
fVCLK = fHCLK/2; Flash in pipelined mode;  
VCCmax  
fHCLK = 100 MHz  
130  
270  
mA  
(1)  
(2)  
fHCLK = 160 MHz  
160  
300  
LBIST/PBIST clock  
frequency = 50 MHz  
150(1)  
215(1)  
240(1)  
290(3)(4)  
ICC  
LBIST/PBIST clock  
frequency = 80 MHz  
(3)(4)  
VCC digital supply current (LBIST/PBIST mode)  
360  
mA  
LBIST/PBIST clock  
frequency = 90 MHz  
(3)(4)  
390  
ICCIO  
VCCIO digital supply current (operating mode)  
VCCAD supply current (operating mode)  
No DC load, VCCmax  
15  
15  
mA  
mA  
Single ADC  
operational,  
VCCADmax  
ICCAD  
Both ADCs  
operational,  
VCCADmax  
30  
3
Single ADC  
operational,  
ADREFHImax  
ICCREFHI  
ADREFHI supply current (operating mode)  
mA  
mA  
Both ADCs  
operational,  
ADREFHImax  
6
Read from 1 bank  
and program  
another bank,  
VCCPmax  
ICCP  
VCCP supply current  
55  
(1) The typical value is the average current for the nominal process corner and junction temperature of 25°C.  
(2) The maximum ICC, value can be derated  
linearly with voltage  
by 0.85 mA/MHz for lower operating frequency when fHCLK= 2 * fVCLK  
for lower junction temperature by the equation below where TJK is the junction temperature in Kelvin and the result is in milliamperes.  
126 - 0.005 e0.024 T  
JK  
(3) The maximum ICC, value can be derated  
linearly with voltage  
by 0.85 mA/MHz for lower operating frequency  
for lower junction temperature by the equation below where TJK is the junction temperature in Kelvin and the result is in milliamperes.  
126 - 0.005 e0.024 T  
JK  
(4) LBIST and PBIST currents are for a short duration, typically less than 10 ms. They are usually ignored for thermal calculations for the  
device and the voltage regulator.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
39  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
5.7 Thermal Resistance Characteristics  
Table 5-1 shows the thermal resistance characteristics for the QFP - PGE mechanical package.  
Table 5-2 shows the thermal resistance characteristics for the QFP - PZ mechanical package.  
Table 5-1. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (PGE Package)  
°C/W  
Junction-to-free air thermal resistance, still  
RΘJA  
37.5  
air using JEDEC 2S2P test board  
Junction-to-board thermal resistance  
Junction-to-case thermal resistance  
Junction-to-package top, Still air  
RΘJB  
RΘJC  
ΨJT  
19.7  
9.4  
0.40  
Table 5-2. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (PZ Package)  
°C/W  
Junction-to-free air thermal resistance, still  
43.5  
RΘJA  
air using JEDEC 2S2P test board  
RΘJB  
RΘJC  
ΨJT  
Junction-to-board thermal resistance  
Junction-to-case thermal resistance  
Junction-to-package top, Still air  
21.6  
11.2  
0.50  
40  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
5.8 Timing and Switching Characteristics  
5.8.1 SYSCLK (Frequencies)  
5.8.1.1 Switching Characteristics over Recommended Operating Conditions for Clock Domains  
Table 5-3. Clock Domain Timing Specifications  
PARAMETER  
DESCRIPTION  
HCLK - System clock frequency  
GCLK - CPU clock frequency  
CONDITIONS  
MIN  
MAX  
100  
45  
UNIT  
Pipeline mode enabled  
Pipeline mode disabled  
Pipeline mode enabled  
Pipeline mode disabled  
PZ  
fHCLK  
MHz  
160  
50  
PGE  
fGCLK  
fVCLK  
fVCLK2  
fVCLK4  
fVCLKA1  
fRTICLK  
fHCLK  
MHz  
MHz  
VCLK - Primary peripheral clock  
frequency  
100  
100  
150  
VCLK2 - Secondary peripheral clock  
frequency  
MHz  
MHz  
VCLK4 - Secondary peripheral clock  
frequency  
VCLKA1 - Primary asynchronous  
peripheral clock frequency  
100  
MHz  
MHz  
RTICLK - Clock frequency  
fVCLK  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
41  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
5.8.1.2 Wait States Required - PGE and PZ Packages  
w!a  
!ddress íꢀit {tꢀtes  
0 aIz  
0
0
fI/[Y(mꢀx)  
5ꢀtꢀ íꢀit {tꢀtes  
0 aIz  
fI/[Y(mꢀx)  
Clꢀsh (aꢀin aemory)  
!ddress íꢀit {tꢀtes  
wí!LÇ {etting  
0
1
0 aIz  
0 aIz  
1ꢁ0aIz fI/[Y(mꢀx)  
0
1
2
3
ꢁ0aIz  
2
100aIz  
1ꢁ0aIz fI/[Y(mꢀx)  
Clꢀsh (5ꢀtꢀ aemory)  
9í!LÇ {etting  
1
4
6
7
8
3
f
ꢂ0aIz 10ꢁaIz 120aIz 13ꢁaIz 1ꢁ0aIz  
I/[Y(mꢀx)  
0 aIz  
4ꢁaIz  
60aIz  
7ꢁaIz  
Figure 5-1. Wait States Scheme — PGE, 160 MHz  
w!a  
!ddress íꢀit {tꢀtes  
0
0
0 aIz  
fI/[Y(mꢀx)  
5ꢀtꢀ íꢀit {tꢀtes  
0 aIz  
fI/[Y(mꢀx)  
Clꢀsh (aꢀin aemory)  
!ddress íꢀit {tꢀtes  
0
0 aIz  
0 aIz  
fI/[Y(mꢀx)  
wí!LÇ {etting  
0
1
ꢁ0aIz  
fI/[Y(mꢀx)  
Clꢀsh (5ꢀtꢀ aemory)  
9í!LÇ {etting  
1
2
3
4
0 aIz  
4ꢁaIz  
60aIz  
7ꢁaIz  
ꢂ0aIz fI/[Y(mꢀx)  
Figure 5-2. Wait States Scheme — PZ, 100 MHz  
As shown in Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2, the TCM RAM can support program and data fetches at full CPU  
speed without any address or data wait states required.  
The TCM flash can support zero address and data wait states up to a CPU speed of 50 MHz in  
nonpipelined mode. The flash supports a maximum CPU clock speed of 160 MHz in pipelined mode for  
the PGE Package, and 100 MHz for the PZ package.  
The flash wrapper defaults to nonpipelined mode with zero address wait state and one random-read data  
wait state.  
42  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6 System Information and Electrical Specifications  
6.1 Device Power Domains  
The device core logic is split up into multiple power domains to optimize the power for a given application  
use case. There are five core power domains: PD1, PD2, PD3, PD5, and RAM_PD1. See Section 1.4 for  
more information.  
PD1 is an "always-ON" power domain, which cannot be turned off. Each of the other core power domains  
can be turned ON/OFF one time during device initialization as per the application requirement. Refer to  
the Power Management Module (PMM) chapter of the device technical reference manual for more details.  
NOTE  
The clocks to a module must be turned off before powering down the core domain that  
contains the module.  
6.2 Voltage Monitor Characteristics  
A voltage monitor is implemented on this device. The purpose of this voltage monitor is to eliminate the  
requirement for a specific sequence when powering up the core and I/O voltage supplies.  
6.2.1 Important Considerations  
The voltage monitor does not eliminate the need of a voltage supervisor circuit to ensure that the device is held in  
reset when the voltage supplies are out of range.  
The voltage monitor only monitors the core supply (VCC) and the I/O supply (VCCIO). The other supplies are not  
monitored by the VMON. For example, if the VCCAD or VCCP are supplied from a source different from that for  
VCCIO, then there is no internal voltage monitor for the VCCAD and VCCP supplies.  
6.2.2 Voltage Monitor Operation  
The voltage monitor generates the Power Good MCU signal (PGMCU) as well as the I/Os Power Good IO  
signal (PGIO) on the device. During power-up or power-down, the PGMCU and PGIO are driven low when  
the core or I/O supplies are lower than the specified minimum monitoring thresholds. The PGIO and  
PGMCU signals being low isolates the core logic as well as the I/O controls during power up or power  
down of the supplies. This allows the core and I/O supplies to be powered up or down in any order.  
When the voltage monitor detects a low voltage on the I/O supply, it will assert a power-on reset. When  
the voltage monitor detects an out-of-range voltage on the core supply, it asynchronously makes all output  
pins high impedance, and asserts a power-on reset. The voltage monitor is disabled when the device  
enters a low power mode.  
The VMON also incorporates a glitch filter for the nPORRST input. Refer to Section 6.3.3.1 for the timing  
information on this glitch filter.  
Table 6-1. Voltage Monitoring Specifications  
PARAMETER  
VCC low - VCC level below this  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX UNIT  
0.75  
0.9  
1.13  
threshold is detected as too low.  
Voltage monitoring  
thresholds  
VCC high - VCC level above this  
threshold is detected as too high.  
VMON  
1.40  
1.85  
1.7  
2.4  
2.1  
2.9  
V
VCCIO low - VCCIO level below this  
threshold is detected as too low.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
43  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.2.3 Supply Filtering  
The VMON has the capability to filter glitches on the VCC and VCCIO supplies.  
The following table shows the characteristics of the supply filtering. Glitches in the supply larger than the  
maximum specification cannot be filtered.  
Table 6-2. VMON Supply Glitch Filtering Capability  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
250  
250  
MAX  
1000  
1000  
UNIT  
ns  
Width of glitch on VCC that can be filtered  
Width of glitch on VCCIO that can be filtered  
ns  
6.3 Power Sequencing and Power-On Reset  
6.3.1 Power-Up Sequence  
There is no timing dependency between the ramp of the VCCIO and the VCC supply voltage. The power-  
up sequence starts with the I/O voltage rising above the minimum I/O supply threshold, (see Table 6-4 for  
more details), core voltage rising above the minimum core supply threshold and the release of power-on  
reset. The high-frequency oscillator will start up first and its amplitude will grow to an acceptable level. The  
oscillator start-up time is dependent on the type of oscillator and is provided by the oscillator vendor. The  
different supplies to the device can be powered up in any order.  
The device goes through the following sequential phases during power up.  
Table 6-3. Power-Up Phases  
Oscillator start-up and validity check  
eFuse autoload  
1032 oscillator cycles  
1160 oscillator cycles  
688 oscillator cycles  
617 oscillator cycles  
3497 oscillator cycles  
Flash pump power-up  
Flash bank power-up  
Total  
The CPU reset is released at the end of the above sequence and fetches the first instruction from address  
0x00000000.  
6.3.2 Power-Down Sequence  
The different supplies to the device can be powered down in any order.  
44  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.3.3 Power-On Reset: nPORRST  
This is the power-on reset. This reset must be asserted by an external circuitry whenever any power  
supply is outside the specified recommended range. This signal has a glitch filter on it. It also has an  
internal pulldown.  
6.3.3.1 nPORRST Electrical and Timing Requirements  
Table 6-4. Electrical Requirements for nPORRST  
NO.  
MIN  
MAX  
UNIT  
VCCPORL  
VCCPORH  
VCC low supply level when nPORRST must be active during power up  
0.5  
V
VCC high supply level when nPORRST must remain active during power  
up and become active during power down  
1.14  
V
V
V
VCCIO / VCCP low supply level when nPORRST must be active during  
power up  
VCCIOPORL  
1.1  
VCCIO / VCCP high supply level when nPORRST must remain active  
during power up and become active during power down  
VCCIOPORH  
VIL(PORRST)  
3.0  
Low-level input voltage of nPORRST VCCIO > 2.5 V  
Low-level input voltage of nPORRST VCCIO < 2.5 V  
0.2 * VCCIO  
0.5  
V
V
Setup time, nPORRST active before VCCIO and VCCP > VCCIOPORL during  
power up  
3
tsu(PORRST)  
0
ms  
6
7
8
9
th(PORRST)  
tsu(PORRST)  
th(PORRST)  
th(PORRST)  
Hold time, nPORRST active after VCC > VCCPORH  
1
2
1
0
ms  
µs  
Setup time, nPORRST active before VCC < VCCPORH during power down  
Hold time, nPORRST active after VCCIO and VCCP > VCCIOPORH  
Hold time, nPORRST active after VCC < VCCPORL  
ms  
ms  
Filter  
time  
nPORRST  
pin;  
tf(nPORRST)  
475  
2000  
ns  
pulses less than MIN will be filtered out, pulses greater than MAX will  
generate a reset.  
3.3 V  
1.2 V  
V
V
VCCIOPORH  
CCIOPORH  
V
/ V  
CCP  
CCIO  
8
6
V
CC  
V
V
CCPORH  
CCPORH  
7
6
V
7
CCIOPORL  
CCIOPORL  
V
V
CCPORL  
CCPORL  
V
(1.2 V)  
CC  
V
/ V  
(3.3 V)  
CCP  
CCIO  
3
9
V
V
IL  
V
V
V
IL(PORRST)  
IL(PORRST)  
IL  
IL  
nPORRST  
V
IL  
A. Figure 6-1 shows that there is no timing dependency between the ramp of the VCCIO and the VCC supply voltages.  
Figure 6-1. nPORRST Timing Diagram(A)  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
45  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.4 Warm Reset (nRST)  
This is a bidirectional reset signal. The internal circuitry drives the signal low on detecting any device reset  
condition. An external circuit can assert a device reset by forcing the signal low. On this terminal, the  
output buffer is implemented as an open drain (drives low only). To ensure an external reset is not  
arbitrarily generated, TI recommends that an external pullup resistor is connected to this terminal.  
This terminal has a glitch filter. It also has an internal pullup  
6.4.1 Causes of Warm Reset  
Table 6-5. Causes of Warm Reset  
DEVICE EVENT  
SYSTEM STATUS FLAG  
Exception Status Register, bit 15  
Global Status Register, bit 0  
Power-Up Reset  
Oscillator fail  
PLL slip  
Global Status Register, bits 8 and 9  
Exception Status Register, bit 13  
Exception Status Register, bit 5  
Exception Status Register, bit 4  
Exception Status Register, bit 3  
Watchdog exception / Debugger reset  
CPU Reset (driven by the CPU STC)  
Software Reset  
External Reset  
6.4.2 nRST Timing Requirements  
Table 6-6. nRST Timing Requirements(1)  
MIN  
MAX  
UNIT  
Valid time, nRST active after nPORRST inactive  
2256tc(OSC)  
tv(RST)  
ns  
Valid time, nRST active (all other System reset  
conditions)  
32tc(VCLK)  
Filter  
time  
nRST  
pin;  
tf(nRST)  
475  
2000  
ns  
pulses less than MIN will be filtered out, pulses greater  
than MAX will generate a reset  
(1) Specified values do not include rise/fall times. For rise and fall timings, see Table 7-2.  
46  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.5 ARM Cortex-R4F CPU Information  
6.5.1 Summary of ARM Cortex-R4F CPU Features  
The features of the ARM Cortex-R4F CPU include:  
An integer unit with integral EmbeddedICE-RT logic.  
High-speed Advanced Microprocessor Bus Architecture (AMBA) Advanced eXtensible Interfaces (AXI)  
for Level two (L2) master and slave interfaces.  
Floating-Point Coprocessor  
Dynamic branch prediction with a global history buffer, and a 4-entry return stack  
Low interrupt latency.  
Nonmaskable interrupt.  
A Harvard Level one (L1) memory system with:  
Tightly-Coupled Memory (TCM) interfaces with support for error correction or parity checking  
memories  
ARMv7-R architecture Memory Protection Unit (MPU) with 12 regions  
Dual core logic for fault detection in safety-critical applications.  
An L2 memory interface:  
Single 64-bit master AXI interface  
64-bit slave AXI interface to TCM RAM blocks  
A debug interface to a CoreSight Debug Access Port (DAP).  
Six Hardware Breakpoints  
Two Watchpoints  
A Performance Monitoring Unit (PMU).  
A Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC) port.  
For more information on the ARM Cortex-R4F CPU, see www.arm.com.  
6.5.2 ARM Cortex-R4F CPU Features Enabled by Software  
The following CPU features are disabled on reset and must be enabled by the application if required.  
ECC On Tightly-Coupled Memory (TCM) Accesses  
Hardware Vectored Interrupt (VIC) Port  
Floating-Point Coprocessor  
Memory Protection Unit (MPU)  
6.5.3 Dual Core Implementation  
The device has two Cortex-R4F cores, where the output signals of both CPUs are compared in the CCM-  
R4 unit. To avoid common mode impacts the signals of the CPUs to be compared are delayed by two  
clock cycles as shown in Figure 6-2.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
47  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Output + Control  
CCM-R4  
2 cycle delay  
CCM-R4  
compare  
compare  
error  
CPU1CLK  
CPU 1  
CPU 2  
2 cycle delay  
CPU2CLK  
Input + Control  
Figure 6-2. Dual Core Implementation  
The CPUs have a diverse CPU placement given by following requirements:  
different orientation; for example, CPU1 = "north" orientation, CPU2 = "flip west" orientation  
dedicated guard ring for each CPU  
Flip West  
North  
F
Figure 6-3. Dual-CPU Orientation  
6.5.4 Duplicate Clock Tree After GCLK  
The CPU clock domain is split into two clock trees, one for each CPU, with the clock of the second CPU  
running at the same frequency and in phase to the clock of CPU1. See Figure 6-2.  
6.5.5 ARM Cortex-R4F CPU Compare Module (CCM) for Safety  
This device has two ARM Cortex-R4F CPU cores, where the output signals of both CPUs are compared in  
the CCM-R4 unit. To avoid common mode impacts the signals of the CPUs to be compared are delayed in  
a different way as shown in Figure 6-2.  
To avoid an erroneous CCM-R4 compare error, the application software must initialize the registers of  
both CPUs before the registers are used, including function calls where the register values are pushed  
onto the stack.  
48  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.5.6 CPU Self-Test  
The CPU STC (Self-Test Controller) is used to test the two Cortex-R4F CPU Cores using the  
Deterministic Logic BIST Controller as the test engine.  
The main features of the self-test controller are:  
Ability to divide the complete test run into independent test intervals  
Capable of running the complete test as well as running few intervals at a time  
Ability to continue from the last executed interval (test set) as well as ability to restart from the  
beginning (First test set)  
Complete isolation of the self-tested CPU core from rest of the system during the self-test run  
Ability to capture the Failure interval number  
Time-out counter for the CPU self-test run as a fail-safe feature  
6.5.6.1 Application Sequence for CPU Self-Test  
1. Configure clock domain frequencies.  
2. Select number of test intervals to be run.  
3. Configure the time-out period for the self-test run.  
4. Enable self-test.  
5. Wait for CPU reset.  
6. In the reset handler, read CPU self-test status to identify any failures.  
7. Retrieve CPU state if required.  
For more information see the device Technical Reference Manual.  
6.5.6.2 CPU Self-Test Clock Configuration  
The maximum clock rate for the self-test is HCLKmax/2. The STCCLK is divided down from the CPU  
clock. This divider is configured by the STCCLKDIV register at address 0xFFFFE108.  
For more information see the device-specific Technical Reference Manual.  
6.5.6.3 CPU Self-Test Coverage  
Table 6-7 lists the CPU self-test coverage achieved for each self-test interval. It also lists the cumulative  
test cycles. The test time can be calculated by multiplying the number of test cycles with the STC clock  
period.  
Table 6-7. CPU Self-Test Coverage  
INTERVALS  
TEST COVERAGE, %  
STCCLK CYLCES  
0
0
1
0
62.13  
70.09  
74.49  
77.28  
79.28  
80.90  
82.02  
83.10  
84.08  
84.87  
85.59  
86.11  
1365  
2
2730  
3
4095  
4
5460  
5
6825  
6
8190  
7
9555  
8
10920  
12285  
13650  
15015  
16380  
9
10  
11  
12  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
49  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 6-7. CPU Self-Test Coverage (continued)  
INTERVALS  
TEST COVERAGE, %  
STCCLK CYLCES  
17745  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
86.67  
87.16  
87.61  
87.98  
88.38  
88.69  
88.98  
89.28  
89.50  
89.76  
90.01  
90.21  
19110  
20475  
21840  
23205  
24570  
25935  
27300  
28665  
30030  
31395  
32760  
50  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.6 Clocks  
6.6.1 Clock Sources  
Table 6-8 lists the available clock sources on the device. Each clock source can be enabled or disabled  
using the CSDISx registers in the system module. The clock source number in the table corresponds to  
the control bit in the CSDISx register for that clock source.  
Table 6-8 also shows the default state of each clock source.  
Table 6-8. Available Clock Sources  
CLOCK  
SOURCE NO.  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
DEFAULT STATE  
0
1
2
3
4
OSCIN  
PLL1  
Main oscillator  
Output from PLL1  
Reserved  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Reserved  
EXTCLKIN1  
LFLPO  
External clock input 1  
Low-frequency output of internal reference oscillator  
High-frequency output of internal reference  
oscillator  
5
HFLPO  
Enabled  
6
7
Reserved  
Reserved  
Disabled  
Disabled  
EXTCLKIN2  
External clock input 2  
6.6.1.1 Main Oscillator  
The oscillator is enabled by connecting the appropriate fundamental resonator/crystal and load capacitors  
across the external OSCIN and OSCOUT pins as shown in Figure 6-4. The oscillator is a single-stage  
inverter held in bias by an integrated bias resistor. This resistor is disabled during leakage test  
measurement and low power modes.  
NOTE  
TI strongly encourages each customer to submit samples of the device to the  
resonator/crystal vendors for validation. The vendors are equipped to determine which load  
capacitors will best tune their resonator/crystal to the microcontroller device for optimum  
start-up and operation over temperature and voltage extremes.  
An external oscillator source can be used by connecting a 3.3-V clock signal to the OSCIN pin and leaving  
the OSCOUT pin unconnected (open) as shown in Figure 6-4.  
(see Note B)  
OSCIN  
Kelvin_GND  
OSCOUT  
OSCIN  
OSCOUT  
C1  
C2  
External  
Clock Signal  
(toggling 0 V to 3.3 V)  
(see Note A)  
Crystal  
(a)  
(b)  
Note A: The values of C1 and C2 should be provided by the resonator/crystal vendor.  
Note B: Kelvin_GND should not be connected to any other GND.  
Figure 6-4. Recommended Crystal/Clock Connection  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
51  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.6.1.1.1 Timing Requirements for Main Oscillator  
Table 6-9. Timing Requirements for Main Oscillator  
MIN  
NOM  
MAX  
UNIT  
tc(OSC)  
Cycle time, OSCIN (when using a sine-wave input)  
50  
200  
ns  
Pulse duration, OSCIN low (when input to the OSCIN  
is a square wave)  
tw(OSCIL)  
15  
15  
ns  
ns  
Pulse duration, OSCIN high (when input to the OSCIN  
is a square wave)  
tw(OSCIH)  
6.6.1.2 Low-Power Oscillator  
The Low-Power Oscillator (LPO) is comprised of two oscillators — HF LPO and LF LPO, in a single  
macro.  
6.6.1.2.1 Features  
The main features of the LPO are:  
Supplies a clock at extremely low power for power-saving modes. This is connected as clock source 4  
of the Global Clock Module (GCM).  
Supplies a high-frequency clock for non-timing-critical systems. This is connected as clock source 5 of  
the GCM.  
Provides a comparison clock for the crystal oscillator failure detection circuit.  
BIAS_EN  
LFEN  
LFLPO  
LF_TRIM  
Low-Power  
Oscillator  
HFEN  
HFLPO  
HF_TRIM  
HFLPO_VALID  
nPORRST  
Figure 6-5. LPO Block Diagram  
Figure 6-5 shows a block diagram of the internal reference oscillator. This is a low-power oscillator (LPO)  
and provides two clock sources: one nominally 80 kHz and one nominally 10 MHz.  
52  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.6.1.2.2 LPO Electrical and Timing Specifications  
Table 6-10. LPO Specifications  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNIT  
Clock detection  
Oscillator fail frequency - lower threshold, using untrimmed  
LPO output  
1.375  
2.4  
4.875  
MHz  
Oscillator fail frequency - higher threshold, using untrimmed  
LPO output  
22  
38.4  
78  
MHz  
LPO - HF oscillator  
Untrimmed frequency  
Trimmed frequency  
5.5  
8
9
19.5  
11  
MHz  
MHz  
9.6  
Start-up time from STANDBY (LPO BIAS_EN high for at  
least 900 µs)  
10  
µs  
Cold start-up time  
900  
180  
µs  
LPO - LF oscillator  
Untrimmed frequency  
36  
85  
kHz  
Start-up time from STANDBY (LPO BIAS_EN high for at  
least 900 µs)  
100  
µs  
µs  
Cold start-up time  
2000  
6.6.1.3 Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) Clock Module  
The PLL is used to multiply the input frequency to some higher frequency.  
The main features of the PLL are:  
Frequency modulation can be optionally superimposed on the synthesized frequency of PLL1.  
Configurable frequency multipliers and dividers  
Built-in PLL Slip monitoring circuit  
Option to reset the device on a PLL slip detection  
6.6.1.3.1 Block Diagram  
Figure 6-6 shows a high-level block diagram of the PLL macro on this microcontroller.  
PLLCLK  
OSCIN  
INTCLK  
/NR  
/OD  
/R  
VCOCLK  
post_ODCLK  
PLL  
/1 to /64  
/1 to /8  
/1 to /32  
/NF  
fPLLCLK = (fOSCIN / NR) * NF / (OD * R)  
/1 to /256  
Figure 6-6. PLL Block Diagram  
6.6.1.3.2 PLL Timing Specifications  
Table 6-11. PLL Timing Specifications  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
MAX  
20  
UNIT  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
fINTCLK  
PLL1 Reference Clock frequency  
1
fpost_ODCLK  
fVCOCLK  
Post-ODCLK – PLL1 Post-divider input clock frequency  
VCOCLK – PLL1 Output Divider (OD) input clock frequency  
400  
550  
150  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
53  
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.6.1.4 External Clock Inputs  
The device supports up to two external clock inputs. This clock input must be a square-wave input.  
Table 6-12 specifies the electrical and timing requirements for these clock inputs. The external clock  
sources are not checked for validity. They are assumed valid when enabled.  
Table 6-12. External Clock Timing and Electrical Specifications  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
MAX  
UNIT  
MHz  
ns  
fEXTCLKx  
External clock input frequency  
EXTCLK high-pulse duration  
EXTCLK low-pulse duration  
Low-level input voltage  
80  
tw(EXTCLKIN)H  
tw(EXTCLKIN)L  
viL(EXTCLKIN)  
viH(EXTCLKIN)  
6
6
ns  
–0.3  
2
0.8  
V
High-level input voltage  
VCCIO + 0.3  
V
6.6.2 Clock Domains  
6.6.2.1 Clock Domain Descriptions  
Table 6-13 lists the device clock domains and their default clock sources. The table also shows the  
system module control register that is used to select an available clock source for each clock domain.  
Table 6-13. Clock Domain Descriptions  
SOURCE  
SELECTION  
REGISTER  
CLOCK  
DOMAIN  
DEFAULT  
SOURCE  
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS  
Is disabled through the CDDISx registers bit 1  
HCLK  
GCLK  
OSCIN  
OSCIN  
GHVSRC  
GHVSRC  
Used for all system modules including DMA,  
ESM  
Always the same frequency as HCLK  
In phase with HCLK  
Is disabled separately from HCLK through the  
CDDISx registers bit 0  
Can be divided by 1 up to 8 when running CPU  
self-test (LBIST) using the CLKDIV field of the  
STCCLKDIV register at address 0xFFFFE108  
Always the same frequency as GCLK  
2 cycles delayed from GCLK  
Is disabled along with GCLK  
GCLK2  
VCLK  
OSCIN  
OSCIN  
OSCIN  
OSCIN  
GHVSRC  
GHVSRC  
GHVSRC  
GHVSRC  
Gets divided by the same divider setting as  
that for GCLK when running CPU self-test  
(LBIST)  
Divided down from HCLK  
Can be HCLK/1, HCLK/2, ... or HCLK/16  
Is disabled separately from HCLK through the  
CDDISx registers bit 2  
Divided down from HCLK  
Can be HCLK/1, HCLK/2, ... or HCLK/16  
Frequency must be an integer multiple of  
VCLK frequency  
VCLK2  
VCLK4  
Is disabled separately from HCLK through the  
CDDISx registers bit 3  
Divided down from HCLK  
Can be HCLK/1, HCLK/2, ... or HCLK/16  
Is disabled separately from HCLK through the  
CDDISx registers bit 9  
54  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 6-13. Clock Domain Descriptions (continued)  
SOURCE  
SELECTION  
REGISTER  
CLOCK  
DOMAIN  
DEFAULT  
SOURCE  
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS  
Defaults to VCLK as the source  
VCLKA1  
VCLK  
VCLK  
VCLKASRC  
RCLKSRC  
Is disabled through the CDDISx registers bit 4  
Defaults to VCLK as the source  
If a clock source other than VCLK is selected  
for RTICLK, then the RTICLK frequency must  
be less than or equal to VCLK/3  
RTICLK  
Application can ensure this by  
programming the RTI1DIV field of the  
RCLKSRC register, if necessary  
Is disabled through the CDDISx registers bit 6  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
55  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.6.2.2 Mapping of Clock Domains to Device Modules  
Each clock domain has a dedicated functionality as shown in Figure 6-7 .  
GCM  
0
GCLK, GCLK2 (to CPU)  
HCLK (to SYSTEM)  
OSCIN  
PLL #1 (FMzPLL)  
1
X1..256  
/1..32  
/1..64  
/1..8  
*
/1..16  
/1..16  
VCLK_peri (VCLK toperipherals on PCR1)  
VCLK_sys (VCLK to system modules)  
VCLK2 (to N2HETx and HTUx)  
4
5
80 kHz  
Low-Power  
Oscillator  
10 MHz  
VCLK4 (ePWM, eQEP, eCAP)  
/1..16  
6
Reserved  
3
7
* the frequency at this node must not  
exceed the maximum HCLK specification.  
0
1
3
4
5
6
7
EXTCLKIN1  
EXTCLKIN2  
VCLKA1 (to DCANx)  
VCLK  
0
1
3
4
5
6
7
/1, 2, 4, or 8  
RTICLK (to RTI, DWWD)  
VCLK  
VCLKA1  
VCLK  
VCLK2  
VCLK2  
HRP  
/1..64  
/1,2,..256  
/2,3..224  
/1,2..32  
/1,2..65536  
/1,2..256  
/1,2,..1024  
N2HETx  
TU  
LRP  
/20..25  
Prop_seg  
Phase_seg2  
I2C baud  
rate  
ECLK  
SPI  
Baud Rate  
ADCLK  
LIN / SCI  
Baud Rate  
Phase_seg1  
I2C  
Loop  
High  
Resolution Clock  
SPIx,MibSPIx  
LIN, SCI  
External Clock  
MibADCx  
EXTCLKIN1  
NTU[3]  
CAN Baud Rate  
DCANx  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
NTU[2]  
NTU[1]  
NTU[0]  
N2HETx  
RTI  
Figure 6-7. Device Clock Domains  
56  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.6.3 Clock Test Mode  
The platform architecture defines a special mode that allows various clock signals to be selected and  
output on the ECLK pin and N2HET1[12] device outputs. This special mode, Clock Test Mode, is very  
useful for debugging purposes and can be configured through the CLKTEST register in the system  
module. See Table 6-14 for the CLKTEST bits value and signal selection.  
Table 6-14. Clock Test Mode Options  
SEL_ECP_PIN  
SEL_GIO_PIN  
=
=
SIGNAL ON ECLK  
SIGNAL ON N2HET1[12]  
CLKTEST[4-0]  
CLKTEST[11-8]  
00000  
00001  
00010  
00011  
00100  
00101  
00110  
00111  
01000  
01001  
01010  
01011  
01100  
01101  
01110  
01111  
10000  
10001  
10010  
10011  
10100  
10101  
10110  
10111  
11000  
Others  
Oscillator  
Main PLL free-running clock output  
Reserved  
EXTCLKIN1  
LFLPO  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
Oscillator Valid Status  
Main PLL Valid status  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
HFLPO  
HFLPO Valid status  
Reserved  
Reserved  
EXTCLKIN2  
GCLK  
Reserved  
LFLPO  
RTI Base  
Oscillator Valid status  
Oscillator Valid status  
Oscillator Valid status  
Oscillator Valid status  
Reserved  
Reserved  
VCLKA1  
VCLKA2  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
HCLK  
Reserved  
Oscillator Valid status  
VCLK  
VCLK2  
Reserved  
VCLK4  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
57  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.7 Clock Monitoring  
The LPO Clock Detect (LPOCLKDET) module consists of a clock monitor (CLKDET) and an internal LPO.  
The LPO provides two different clock sources – a low frequency (LFLPO) and a high frequency (HFLPO).  
The CLKDET is a supervisor circuit for an externally supplied clock signal (OSCIN). In case the OSCIN  
frequency falls out of a frequency window, the CLKDET flags this condition in the global status register  
(GLBSTAT bit 0: OSC FAIL) and switches all clock domains sourced by OSCIN to the HFLPO clock (limp  
mode clock).  
The valid OSCIN frequency range is defined as: fHFLPO / 4 < fOSCIN < fHFLPO * 4.  
6.7.1 Clock Monitor Timings  
For more information on LPO and Clock detection, see Table 6-10.  
upper  
threshold  
lower  
threshold  
fail  
pass  
fail  
f[MHz]  
1.375  
4.875  
22  
78  
Figure 6-8. LPO and Clock Detection, Untrimmed HFLPO  
6.7.2 External Clock (ECLK) Output Functionality  
The ECLK pin can be configured to output a prescaled clock signal indicative of an internal device clock.  
This output can be externally monitored as a safety diagnostic.  
6.7.3 Dual Clock Comparators  
The Dual Clock Comparator (DCC) module determines the accuracy of selectable clock sources by  
counting the pulses of two independent clock sources (counter 0 and counter 1). If one clock is out of  
spec, an error signal is generated. For example, the DCC1 can be configured to use HFLPO as the  
reference clock (for counter 0) and VCLK as the "clock under test" (for counter 1). This configuration  
allows the DCC1 to monitor the PLL output clock when VCLK is using the PLL output as its source.  
An additional use of this module is to measure the frequency of a selectable clock source, using the input  
clock as a reference, by counting the pulses of two independent clock sources. Counter 0 generates a  
fixed-width counting window after a preprogrammed number of pulses. Counter 1 generates a fixed-width  
pulse (1 cycle) after a preprogrammed number of pulses. This pulse sets as an error signal if counter 1  
does not reach 0 within the counting window generated by counter 0.  
6.7.3.1 Features  
Takes two different clock sources as input to two independent counter blocks.  
One of the clock sources is the known-good, or reference clock; the second clock source is the "clock under test."  
Each counter block is programmable with initial, or seed values.  
The counter blocks start counting down from their seed values at the same time; a mismatch from the expected  
frequency for the clock under test generates an error signal which is used to interrupt the CPU.  
58  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.7.3.2 Mapping of DCC Clock Source Inputs  
Table 6-15. DCC1 Counter 0 Clock Sources  
CLOCK SOURCE[3:0]  
CLOCK NAME  
Oscillator (OSCIN)  
High-frequency LPO  
Test clock (TCK)  
Others  
0x5  
0xA  
Table 6-16. DCC1 Counter 1 Clock Sources  
KEY[3:0]  
CLOCK SOURCE[3:0]  
CLOCK NAME  
Others  
N2HET1[31]  
Main PLL free-running clock  
output  
0x0  
0x1  
0x2  
Reserved  
Low-frequency LPO  
High-frequency LPO  
Reserved  
0xA  
0x3  
0x4  
0x5  
EXTCLKIN1  
EXTCLKIN2  
Reserved  
0x6  
0x7  
0x8 - 0xF  
VCLK  
Table 6-17. DCC2 Counter 0 Clock Sources  
CLOCK SOURCE [3:0]  
CLOCK NAME  
Oscillator (OSCIN)  
Test clock (TCK)  
Others  
0xA  
Table 6-18. DCC2 Counter 1 Clock Sources  
KEY [3:0]  
Others  
0xA  
CLOCK SOURCE [3:0]  
CLOCK NAME  
N2HET2[0]  
Reserved  
VCLK  
00x0 - 0x7  
0x8 - 0xF  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
59  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.8 Glitch Filters  
A glitch filter is present on the following signals.  
Table 6-19. Glitch Filter Timing Specifications  
PIN  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
MAX UNIT  
Filter time nPORRST pin; pulses less than MIN will be filtered out, pulses  
greater than MAX will generate a reset(1)  
nPORRST  
tf(nPORRST)  
475  
2000  
2000  
2000  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Filter time nRST pin; pulses less than MIN will be filtered out, pulses  
greater than MAX will generate a reset  
nRST  
TEST  
tf(nRST)  
475  
475  
Filter time TEST pin; pulses less than MIN will be filtered out, pulses  
greater than MAX will pass through  
tf(TEST)  
(1) The glitch filter design on the nPORRST signal is designed such that no size pulse will reset any part of the microcontroller (flash pump,  
I/O pins, and so forth) without also generating a valid reset signal to the CPU.  
60  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.9 Device Memory Map  
6.9.1 Memory Map Diagram  
Figure 6-9 shows the device memory map.  
0xFFFFFFFF  
SYSTEM Modules  
0xFFF80000  
Peripherals - Frame 1  
0xFF000000  
0xFE000000  
CRC  
RESERVED  
0xFCFFFFFF  
0xFC000000  
Peripherals - Frame 2  
RESERVED  
0xF07FFFFF  
Flash Module Bus2 Interface  
(Flash ECC, OTP and  
EEPROM Emulation accesses)  
0xF0000000  
RESERVED  
0x200BFFFF  
0x20000000  
Flash (768KB) (Mirrored Image)  
RESERVED  
0x0841FFFF  
0x08400000  
RAM - ECC  
RESERVED  
0x0801FFFF  
0x08000000  
RAM (128KB)  
RESERVED  
0x000BFFFF  
0x00000000  
Flash (768KB)  
Figure 6-9. Memory Map  
The Flash memory is mirrored to support ECC logic testing. The base address of the mirrored Flash  
image is 0x2000 0000.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
61  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.9.2 Memory Map Table  
See Figure 1-1 for block diagrams showing the devices interconnect.  
Table 6-20. Device Memory Map  
FRAME ADDRESS RANGE  
RESPONSE FOR ACCESS TO  
UNIMPLEMENTED LOCATIONS IN  
FRAME  
FRAME CHIP  
SELECT  
FRAME  
SIZE  
ACTUAL  
SIZE  
MODULE NAME  
START  
END  
Memories tightly coupled to the ARM Cortex-R4F CPU  
TCM Flash  
TCM RAM + RAM ECC  
Mirrored Flash  
CS0  
0x0000_0000  
0x0800_0000  
0x2000_0000  
0x00FF_FFFF  
0x0BFF_FFFF  
0x20FF_FFFF  
16MB  
64MB  
16MB  
768KB  
96KB  
CSRAM0  
Abort  
Flash mirror frame  
768KB  
Flash Module Bus2 Interface  
Customer OTP, TCM  
Flash Banks  
0xF000_0000  
0xF000_1FFF  
0xF000_FFFF  
0xF004_03FF  
0xF004_1FFF  
0xF008_1FFF  
0xF008_FFFF  
0xF00C_03FF  
0xF00C_1FFF  
8KB  
8KB  
1KB  
1KB  
8KB  
8KB  
1KB  
1KB  
4KB  
1KB  
Customer OTP,  
Bank 7  
0xF000_E000  
0xF004_0000  
0xF004_1C00  
0xF008_0000  
0xF008_E000  
0xF00C_0000  
0xF00C_1C00  
Customer OTP–ECC,  
TCM Flash Banks  
512B  
128B  
4KB  
Customer OTP–ECC,  
Bank 7  
TI OTP, TCM Flash  
Banks  
TI OTP,  
Bank 7  
1KB  
Abort  
TI OTP–ECC, TCM  
Flash Banks  
512B  
128B  
TI OTP–ECC,  
Bank 7  
Bank 7 – ECC  
Bank 7  
0xF010_0000  
0xF020_0000  
0xF040_0000  
0xF013_FFFF  
0xF03F_FFFF  
0xF04F_FFFF  
256KB  
2MB  
8KB  
64KB  
128KB  
Flash Data Space ECC  
1MB  
SCR5: Enhanced Timer Peripherals  
0xFCF7_8C00 256B  
ePWM1  
ePWM2  
ePWM3  
ePWM4  
ePWM5  
ePWM6  
ePWM7  
eCAP1  
eCAP2  
eCAP3  
eCAP4  
eCAP5  
eCAP6  
eQEP1  
eQEP2  
0xFCF7_8CFF  
0xFCF7_8DFF  
0xFCF7_8EFF  
0xFCF7_8FFF  
0xFCF7_90FF  
0xFCF7_91FF  
0xFCF7_92FF  
0xFCF7_93FF  
0xFCF7_94FF  
0xFCF7_95FF  
0xFCF7_96FF  
0xFCF7_97FF  
0xFCF7_98FF  
0xFCF7_99FF  
0xFCF7_9AFF  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
Abort  
0xFCF7_8D00  
0xFCF7_8E00  
0xFCF7_8F00  
0xFCF7_9000  
0xFCF7_9100  
0xFCF7_9200  
0xFCF7_9300  
0xFCF7_9400  
0xFCF7_9500  
0xFCF7_9600  
0xFCF7_9700  
0xFCF7_9800  
0xFCF7_9900  
0xFCF7_9A00  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
Cyclic Redundancy Checker (CRC) Module Registers  
CRC  
CRC frame  
0xFE00_0000  
0xFEFF_FFFF  
Peripheral Memories  
0xFF0B_FFFF  
16MB  
512B  
Accesses above 0x200 generate abort.  
MIBSPI5 RAM  
MIBSPI3 RAM  
MIBSPI1 RAM  
PCS[5]  
PCS[6]  
PCS[7]  
0xFF0A_0000  
0xFF0C_0000  
0xFF0E_0000  
128KB  
128KB  
128KB  
2KB  
2KB  
2KB  
Abort for accesses above 2KB  
Abort for accesses above 2KB  
Abort for accesses above 2KB  
0xFF0D_FFFF  
0xFF0F_FFFF  
Wrap around for accesses to  
unimplemented address offsets lower  
than 0x7FF. Abort generated for  
accesses beyond offset 0x800.  
DCAN3 RAM  
PCS[13]  
0xFF1A_0000  
0xFF1B_FFFF  
128KB  
2KB  
62  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 6-20. Device Memory Map (continued)  
FRAME ADDRESS RANGE  
RESPONSE FOR ACCESS TO  
UNIMPLEMENTED LOCATIONS IN  
FRAME  
FRAME CHIP  
SELECT  
FRAME  
SIZE  
ACTUAL  
SIZE  
MODULE NAME  
START  
END  
Wrap around for accesses to  
unimplemented address offsets lower  
than 0x7FF. Abort generated for  
accesses beyond offset 0x800.  
DCAN2 RAM  
DCAN1 RAM  
MIBADC2 RAM  
PCS[14]  
PCS[15]  
0xFF1C_0000  
0xFF1D_FFFF  
128KB  
128KB  
2KB  
2KB  
8KB  
Wrap around for accesses to  
unimplemented address offsets lower  
than 0x7FF. Abort generated for  
accesses beyond offset 0x800.  
0xFF1E_0000  
0xFF3A_0000  
0xFF1F_FFFF  
0xFF3B_FFFF  
Wrap around for accesses to  
unimplemented address offsets lower  
than 0x1FFF. Abort generated for  
accesses beyond 0x1FFF.  
Look-Up Table for ADC2 wrapper. Starts  
at address offset 0x2000 and ends at  
address offset 0x217F. Wrap around for  
accesses between offsets 0x0180 and  
0x3FFF. Abort generated for accesses  
beyond offset 0x4000.  
PCS[29]  
128KB  
MIBADC2  
Look-Up Table  
384B  
8KB  
Wrap around for accesses to  
unimplemented address offsets lower  
than 0x1FFF. Abort generated for  
accesses beyond 0x1FFF.  
MIBADC1 RAM  
Look-Up Table for ADC1 wrapper. Starts  
at address offset 0x2000 and ends at  
address offset 0x217F. Wrap around for  
accesses between offsets 0x0180 and  
0x3FFF. Abort generated for accesses  
beyond offset 0x4000.  
PCS[31]  
0xFF3E_0000  
0xFF3F_FFFF  
128KB  
MibADC1  
Look-Up Table  
384B  
Wrap around for accesses to  
unimplemented address offsets lower  
than 0x3FFF. Abort generated for  
accesses beyond 0x3FFF.  
N2HET2 RAM  
N2HET1 RAM  
PCS[34]  
PCS[35]  
0xFF44_0000  
0xFF46_0000  
0xFF45_FFFF  
0xFF47_FFFF  
128KB  
128KB  
16KB  
16KB  
Wrap around for accesses to  
unimplemented address offsets lower  
than 0x3FFF. Abort generated for  
accesses beyond 0x3FFF.  
N2HET2 TU2 RAM  
N2HET1 TU1 RAM  
PCS[38]  
PCS[39]  
0xFF4C_0000  
0xFF4E_0000  
0xFF4D_FFFF  
0xFF4F_FFFF  
128KB  
128KB  
1KB  
1KB  
Abort  
Abort  
Debug Components  
0xFFA0_0FFF  
CoreSight Debug ROM  
Cortex-R4F Debug  
CSCS0  
CSCS1  
0xFFA0_0000  
0xFFA0_1000  
4KB  
4KB  
4KB  
4KB  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
0xFFA0_1FFF  
Peripheral Control Registers  
0xFFF7_A400  
HTU1  
HTU2  
PS[22]  
PS[22]  
PS[17]  
PS[17]  
PS[16]  
PS[15]  
PS[15]  
PS[10]  
PS[8]  
0xFFF7_A4FF  
0xFFF7_A5FF  
0xFFF7_B8FF  
0xFFF7_B9FF  
0xFFF7_BDFF  
0xFFF7_C1FF  
0xFFF7_C3FF  
0xFFF7_D4FF  
0xFFF7_DDFF  
0xFFF7_DFFF  
0xFFF7_E1FF  
0xFFF7_E4FF  
0xFFF7_E5FF  
0xFFF7_F5FF  
0xFFF7_F7FF  
0xFFF7_F9FF  
0xFFF7_FBFF  
0xFFF7_FDFF  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
512B  
512B  
512B  
256B  
512B  
512B  
512B  
256B  
256B  
512B  
512B  
512B  
512B  
512B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
512B  
512B  
256B  
512B  
512B  
512B  
256B  
256B  
512B  
512B  
512B  
512B  
512B  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
0xFFF7_A500  
0xFFF7_B800  
0xFFF7_B900  
0xFFF7_BC00  
0xFFF7_C000  
0xFFF7_C200  
0xFFF7_D400  
0xFFF7_DC00  
0xFFF7_DE00  
0xFFF7_E000  
0xFFF7_E400  
0xFFF7_E500  
0xFFF7_F400  
0xFFF7_F600  
0xFFF7_F800  
0xFFF7_FA00  
0xFFF7_FC00  
N2HET1  
N2HET2  
GIO  
MIBADC1  
MIBADC2  
I2C  
DCAN1  
DCAN2  
DCAN3  
LIN  
PS[8]  
PS[7]  
PS[6]  
SCI  
PS[6]  
MibSPI1  
SPI2  
PS[2]  
PS[2]  
MibSPI3  
SPI4  
PS[1]  
PS[1]  
MibSPI5  
PS[0]  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
63  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 6-20. Device Memory Map (continued)  
FRAME ADDRESS RANGE  
RESPONSE FOR ACCESS TO  
UNIMPLEMENTED LOCATIONS IN  
FRAME  
FRAME CHIP  
SELECT  
FRAME  
SIZE  
ACTUAL  
SIZE  
MODULE NAME  
START END  
System Modules Control Registers and Memories  
DMA RAM  
VIM RAM  
PPCS0  
PPCS2  
0xFFF8_0000  
0xFFF8_0FFF  
4KB  
4KB  
1KB  
Abort  
Wrap around for accesses to  
unimplemented address offsets between  
1KB and 4KB.  
0xFFF8_2000  
0xFFF8_2FFF  
4KB  
Flash Module  
PPCS7  
0xFFF8_7000  
0xFFF8_C000  
0xFFF8_7FFF  
0xFFF8_CFFF  
4KB  
4KB  
4KB  
4KB  
Abort  
Abort  
eFuse Controller  
PPCS12  
Power Management  
Module (PMM)  
PPSE0  
PPS0  
0xFFFF_0000  
0xFFFF_E000  
0xFFFF_01FF  
0xFFFF_E0FF  
512B  
256B  
512B  
256B  
Abort  
PCR registers  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
System Module -  
Frame 2  
PPS0  
0xFFFF_E100  
0xFFFF_E1FF  
256B  
256B  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
(see device TRM)  
PBIST  
STC  
PPS1  
PPS1  
0xFFFF_E400  
0xFFFF_E600  
0xFFFF_E5FF  
0xFFFF_E6FF  
512B  
256B  
512B  
256B  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Generates address error interrupt, if  
enabled  
IOMM Multiplexing  
Control Module  
PPS2  
0xFFFF_EA00  
0xFFFF_EBFF  
512B  
512B  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
DCC1  
DMA  
PPS3  
PPS4  
PPS5  
PPS5  
PPS5  
PPS6  
PPS6  
PPS7  
PPS7  
PPS7  
0xFFFF_EC00  
0xFFFF_F000  
0xFFFF_F400  
0xFFFF_F500  
0xFFFF_F600  
0xFFFF_F800  
0xFFFF_F900  
0xFFFF_FC00  
0xFFFF_FD00  
0xFFFF_FE00  
0xFFFF_ECFF  
0xFFFF_F3FF  
0xFFFF_F4FF  
0xFFFF_F5FF  
0xFFFF_F6FF  
0xFFFF_F8FF  
0xFFFF_F9FF  
0xFFFF_FCFF  
0xFFFF_FDFF  
0xFFFF_FEFF  
256B  
1KB  
256B  
1KB  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
DCC2  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
256B  
ESM  
CCMR4  
RAM ECC even  
RAM ECC odd  
RTI + DWWD  
VIM Parity  
VIM  
System Module -  
Frame 1  
PPS7  
0xFFFF_FF00  
0xFFFF_FFFF  
256B  
256B  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
(see device TRM)  
6.9.3 Special Consideration for CPU Access Errors Resulting in Imprecise Aborts  
Any CPU write access to a Normal or Device type memory, which generates a fault, will generate an  
imprecise abort. The imprecise abort exception is disabled by default and must be enabled for the CPU to  
handle this exception. The imprecise abort handling is enabled by clearing the "A" bit in the CPU program  
status register (CPSR).  
64  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.9.4 Master/Slave Access Privileges  
Table 6-21 lists the access permissions for each bus master on the device. A bus master is a module that  
can initiate a read or a write transaction on the device.  
Each slave module on the main interconnect is listed in the table. Yes indicates that the module listed in  
the MASTERS column can access that slave module.  
Table 6-21. Master / Slave Access Matrix  
MASTERS  
ACCESS MODE  
SLAVES ON MAIN SCR  
CRC  
Flash Module  
Bus2 Interface:  
OTP, ECC, Bank  
7
Non-CPU  
Accesses to  
Program Flash  
and CPU Data  
RAM  
Slave Interfaces  
Peripheral  
Control  
Registers, All  
Peripheral  
Memories, And  
All System  
Module Control  
Registers And  
Memories  
CPU READ  
CPU WRITE  
DMA  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
User  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
DAP  
Privilege  
HTU1  
Privilege  
HTU2  
Privilege  
No  
6.9.5 Special Notes on Accesses to Certain Slaves  
Write accesses to the Power Domain Management Module (PMM) control registers are limited to the CPU  
(master id = 1). The other masters can only read from these registers.  
A debugger can also write to the PMM registers. The master-id check is disabled in debug mode.  
The device contains dedicated logic to generate a bus error response on any access to a module that is in  
a power domain that has been turned off.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
65  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.10 Flash Memory  
6.10.1 Flash Memory Configuration  
Flash Bank: A separate block of logic consisting of 1 to 16 sectors. Each flash bank normally has a  
customer-OTP and a TI-OTP area. These flash sectors share input/output buffers, data paths, sense  
amplifiers, and control logic.  
Flash Sector: A contiguous region of flash memory which must be erased simultaneously due to physical  
construction constraints.  
Flash Pump: A charge pump which generates all the voltages required for reading, programming, or  
erasing the flash banks.  
Flash Module: Interface circuitry required between the host CPU and the flash banks and pump module.  
Table 6-22. Flash Memory Banks and Sectors  
SECTOR  
NO.  
MEMORY ARRAYS (OR BANKS)  
SEGMENT  
LOW ADDRESS  
HIGH ADDRESS  
0
16KB  
16KB  
16KB  
16KB  
16KB  
16KB  
32KB  
128KB  
128KB  
128KB  
128KB  
128KB  
4KB  
0x0000_0000  
0x0000_4000  
0x0000_8000  
0x0000_C000  
0x0001_0000  
0x0001_4000  
0x0001_8000  
0x0002_0000  
0x0004_0000  
0x0006_0000  
0x0008_0000  
0x000A_0000  
0xF020_0000  
0xF020_1000  
0xF020_2000  
0xF020_3000  
0xF020_4000  
0xF020_5000  
0xF020_6000  
0xF020_7000  
0xF020_8000  
0xF020_9000  
0xF020_A000  
0xF020_B000  
0xF020_C000  
0xF020_D000  
0xF020_E000  
0xF020_F000  
0x0000_3FFF  
0x0000_7FFF  
0x0000_BFFF  
0x0000_FFFF  
0x0001_3FFF  
0x0001_7FFF  
0x0001_FFFF  
0x0003_FFFF  
0x0005_FFFF  
0x0007_FFFF  
0x0009_FFFF  
0x000B_FFFF  
0xF020_0FFF  
0xF020_1FFF  
0xF020_2FFF  
0xF020_3FFF  
0xF020_4FFF  
0xF020_5FFF  
0xF020_6FFF  
0xF020_7FFF  
0xF020_8FFF  
0xF020_9FFF  
0xF020_AFFF  
0xF020_BFFF  
0xF020_CFFF  
0xF020_DFFF  
0xF020_EFFF  
0xF020_FFFF  
1
2
3
4
BANK0 (768KB)(1)  
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
0
1
4KB  
2
4KB  
3
4KB  
4
4KB  
5
4KB  
6
4KB  
7
4KB  
BANK7 (64KB) for EEPROM emulation(2)(3)(4)  
8
4KB  
9
4KB  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
4KB  
4KB  
4KB  
4KB  
4KB  
4KB  
(1) Flash bank0 is a 144-bit-wide bank with ECC support.  
(2) Flash bank7 is a 72-bit-wide bank with ECC support.  
(3) The flash bank7 can be programmed while executing code from flash bank0.  
(4) Code execution is not allowed from flash bank7.  
66  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.10.2 Main Features of Flash Module  
Support for multiple flash banks for program and/or data storage  
Simultaneous read access on a bank while performing program or erase operation on any other bank  
Integrated state machines to automate flash erase and program operations  
Pipelined mode operation to improve instruction access interface bandwidth  
Support for Single Error Correction Double Error Detection (SECDED) block inside Cortex-R4F CPU  
Error address is captured for host system debugging  
Support for a rich set of diagnostic features  
6.10.3 ECC Protection for Flash Accesses  
All accesses to the program flash memory are protected by SECDED logic embedded inside the CPU.  
The flash module provides 8 bits of ECC code for 64 bits of instructions or data fetched from the flash  
memory. The CPU calculates the expected ECC code based on the 64 bits received and compares it with  
the ECC code returned by the flash module. A single-bit error is corrected and flagged by the CPU, while  
a multibit error is only flagged. The CPU signals an ECC error through its Event bus. This signaling  
mechanism is not enabled by default and must be enabled by setting the "X" bit of the Performance  
Monitor Control Register, c9.  
MRC p15,#0,r1,c9,c12,#0  
ORR r1, r1, #0x00000010  
MCR p15,#0,r1,c9,c12,#0  
MRC p15,#0,r1,c9,c12,#0  
;Enabling Event monitor states  
;Set 4th bit (‘X’) of PMNC register  
The application must also explicitly enable the ECC checking of the CPU for accesses on the CPU ATCM  
and BTCM interfaces. These are connected to the program flash and data RAM, respectively. ECC  
checking for these interfaces can be done by setting the B1TCMPCEN, B0TCMPCEN, and ATCMPCEN  
bits of the System Control Coprocessor Auxiliary Control Register, c1.  
MRC p15, #0, r1, c1, c0, #1  
ORR r1, r1, #0x0e000000  
DMB  
;Enable ECC checking for ATCM and BTCMs  
MCR p15, #0, r1, c1, c0, #1  
6.10.4 Flash Access Speeds  
For information on flash memory access speeds and the relevant wait states required, see  
Section 5.8.1.2.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
67  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.10.5 Program Flash  
Table 6-23. Timing Requirements for Program Flash  
MIN  
NOM  
MAX  
300  
8
UNIT  
µs  
tprog(144bit)  
tprog(Total)  
Wide Word (144-bit) programming time  
768KB programming time(1)  
40  
–40°C to 125°C  
s
0°C to 60°C, for first  
25 cycles  
2
0.03  
16  
4
4
s
s
–40°C to 125°C  
terase(bank0)  
Sector/Bank erase time(2)  
0°C to 60°C, for first  
25 cycles  
100  
ms  
Write/erase cycles with 15-year Data Retention  
requirement  
twec  
–40°C to 125°C  
1000  
cycles  
(1) This programming time includes overhead of state machine, but does not include data transfer time. The programming time assumes  
programming 144 bits at a time at the maximum specified operating frequency.  
(2) During bank erase, the selected sectors are erased simultaneously. The time to erase the bank is specified as equal to the time to erase  
a sector.  
6.10.6 Data Flash  
Table 6-24. Timing Requirements for Data Flash  
MIN  
NOM  
MAX  
310  
2.6  
UNIT  
µs  
tprog(144bit)  
tprog(Total)  
Wide Word (72-bit) programming time  
47  
–40°C to 125°C  
s
EEPROM Emulation (bank 7) 64KByte  
programming time(1)  
0°C to 60°C, for first  
25 cycles  
775  
0.2  
14  
1435  
8
ms  
s
–40°C to 125°C  
Sector/Bank erase time, EEPROM Emulation  
(bank 7)  
terase(bank7)  
0°C to 60°C, for first  
25 cycles  
100  
ms  
Write/erase cycles with 15-year Data Retention  
requirement  
twec  
–40°C to 125°C  
100000  
cycles  
(1) This programming time includes overhead of state machine, but does not include data transfer time. The programming time assumes  
programming 72 bits at a time at the maximum specified operating frequency.  
68  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.11 Tightly Coupled RAM Interface Module  
Figure 6-10 shows the connection of the Tightly Coupled RAM (TCRAM) to the Cortex-R4F™ CPU.  
Upper 32-bits data  
36-bit-wide  
Cortex R4F™  
and 4 ECC bits  
RAM  
TCM BUS  
TCRAM  
B0  
TCM  
Interface 1  
72-bit data + ECC  
36-bit-wide  
Lower 32-bits data  
and 4 ECC bits  
RAM  
36 t  
Upper 32-bits data  
and 4 ECC bits  
36-bit-wide  
RAM  
TCM BUS  
B1  
TCM  
TCRAM  
72-bit data + ECC  
Interface 2  
36-bit-wide  
Lower 32-bits data  
and 4 ECC bits  
RAM  
Figure 6-10. TCRAM Block Diagram  
6.11.1 Features  
The features of the Tightly Coupled RAM (TCRAM) Module are:  
Acts as slave to the BTCM interface of the Cortex-R4F CPU  
Supports CPU internal ECC scheme by providing 64-bit data and 8-bit ECC code  
Monitors CPU Event Bus and generates single-bit or multibit error interrupts  
Stores addresses for single-bit and multibit errors  
Supports RAM trace module  
Provides CPU address bus integrity checking by supporting parity checking on the address bus  
Performs redundant address decoding for the RAM bank chip select and ECC select generation logic  
Provides enhanced safety for the RAM addressing by implementing two 36-bit-wide byte-interleaved RAM banks  
and generating independent RAM access control signals to the two banks  
Supports auto-initialization of the RAM banks along with the ECC bits  
6.11.2 TCRAMW ECC Support  
The TCRAMW passes on the ECC code for each data read by the Cortex-R4F CPU from the RAM. The  
TCRAMW also stores the ECC port contents of the CPU in the ECC RAM when the CPU does a write to  
the RAM. The TCRAMW monitors the CPU event bus and provides registers for indicating single-bit or  
multibit errors and also for identifying the address that caused the single or multi-bit error. The event  
signaling and the ECC checking for the RAM accesses must be enabled inside the CPU.  
For more information, see the device-specific Technical Reference Manual.  
6.12 Parity Protection for Accesses to Peripheral RAMs  
Accesses to some peripheral RAMs are protected by odd/even parity checking. During a read access the  
parity is calculated based on the data read from the peripheral RAM and compared with the good parity  
value stored in the parity RAM for that peripheral. If any word fails the parity check, the module generates  
a parity error signal that is mapped to the Error Signaling Module. The module also captures the  
peripheral RAM address that caused the parity error.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
69  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
The parity protection for peripheral RAMs is not enabled by default and must be enabled by the  
application. Each individual peripheral contains control registers to enable the parity protection for  
accesses to its RAM.  
NOTE  
The CPU read access gets the actual data from the peripheral. The application can choose  
to generate an interrupt whenever a peripheral RAM parity error is detected.  
70  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.13 On-Chip SRAM Initialization and Testing  
6.13.1 On-Chip SRAM Self-Test Using PBIST  
6.13.1.1 Features  
Extensive instruction set to support various memory test algorithms  
ROM-based algorithms allow application to run TI production-level memory tests  
Independent testing of all on-chip SRAM  
6.13.1.2 PBIST RAM Groups  
Table 6-25. PBIST RAM Grouping  
Test Pattern (Algorithm)  
MARCH 13N(1) MARCH 13N(1)  
TRIPLE READ TRIPLE READ  
RAM  
MEMORY  
MEM  
TYPE  
TWO PORT  
(cycles)  
SINGLE PORT  
(cycles)  
TEST CLOCK  
SLOW READ  
FAST READ  
GROUP  
ALGO MASK  
0x1  
ALGO MASK  
0x2  
ALGO MASK  
0x4  
ALGO MASK  
0x8  
PBIST_ROM  
STC_ROM  
DCAN1  
1
2
ROM CLK  
ROM CLK  
VCLK  
VCLK  
VCLK  
HCLK  
VCLK  
VCLK  
VCLK  
VCLK  
VCLK  
HCLK  
VCLK  
VCLK  
VCLK  
VCLK  
VCLK  
HCLK  
ROM  
24578  
19586  
8194  
6530  
ROM  
3
Dual port  
Dual port  
Dual port  
Single port  
Dual port  
Dual port  
Dual port  
Dual port  
Dual port  
Dual port  
Dual port  
Dual port  
Dual port  
Dual port  
Dual port  
Single port  
25200  
25200  
25200  
DCAN2  
4
DCAN3  
5
ESRAM1(2)  
MIBSPI1  
MIBSPI3  
MIBSPI5  
VIM  
6
266280  
7
33440  
33440  
33440  
12560  
4200  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
18  
19  
20  
21  
MIBADC1  
DMA  
18960  
31680  
6480  
N2HET1  
HET TU1  
MIBADC2  
N2HET2  
HET TU2  
ESRAM5(3)  
4200  
31680  
6480  
266280  
(1) Several memory testing algorithms are stored in the PBIST ROM. However, TI recommends the March13N algorithm for application  
testing of RAM.  
(2) ESRAM1: Address 0x08000000 - 0x0800FFFF  
(3) ESRAM5: Address 0x08010000 - 0x0801FFFF  
The PBIST ROM clock frequency is limited to 100 MHz, if 100 MHz < HCLK <= HCLKmax, or HCLK, if  
HCLK <= 100 MHz.  
The PBIST ROM clock is divided down from HCLK. The divider is selected by programming the ROM_DIV  
field of the Memory Self-Test Global Control Register (MSTGCR) at address 0xFFFFFF58.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
71  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.13.2 On-Chip SRAM Auto Initialization  
This microcontroller allows some of the on-chip memories to be initialized through the Memory Hardware  
Initialization mechanism in the system module. This hardware mechanism allows an application to  
program the memory arrays with error detection capability to a known state based on their error detection  
scheme (odd/even parity or ECC).  
The MINITGCR register enables the memory initialization sequence, and the MSINENA register selects  
the memories that are to be initialized.  
For more information on these registers, see the device-specific Technical Reference Manual.  
The mapping of the different on-chip memories to the specific bits of the MSINENA registers is shown in  
Table 6-26.  
Table 6-26. Memory Initialization  
ADDRESS RANGE  
CONNECTING MODULE  
MSINENA REGISTER BIT #  
BASE ADDRESS  
0x08000000  
0x08010000  
0xFF0A0000  
0xFF0C0000  
0xFF0E0000  
0xFF1A0000  
0xFF1C0000  
0xFF1E0000  
0xFF3A0000  
0xFF3E0000  
0xFF440000  
0xFF460000  
0xFF4C0000  
0xFF4E0000  
0xFFF80000  
0xFFF82000  
ENDING ADDRESS  
0x0800FFFF  
0x0801FFFF  
0xFF0BFFFF  
0xFF0DFFFF  
0xFF0FFFFF  
0xFF1BFFFF  
0xFF1DFFFF  
0xFF1FFFFF  
0xFF3BFFFF  
0xFF3FFFFF  
0xFF45FFFF  
0xFF47FFFF  
0xFF4DFFFF  
0xFF4FFFFF  
0xFFF80FFF  
0xFFF82FFF  
RAM (PD#1)  
RAM (RAM_PD#1)  
MIBSPI5 RAM  
MIBSPI3 RAM  
MIBSPI1 RAM  
DCAN3 RAM  
DCAN2 RAM  
DCAN1 RAM  
MIBADC2 RAM  
MIBADC1 RAM  
N2HET2 RAM  
N2HET1 RAM  
HET TU2 RAM  
HET TU1 RAM  
DMA RAM  
0(1)  
0(1)  
12(2)  
11(2)  
7(2)  
10  
6
5
14  
8
15  
3
16  
4
1
VIM RAM  
2
(1) The TCM RAM wrapper has separate control bits to select the RAM power domain that is to be auto-initialized.  
(2) The MibSPIx modules perform an initialization of the transmit and receive RAMs as soon as the module is released from its local reset.  
This is independent of whether the application chooses to initialize the MibSPIx RAMs using the system module auto-initialization  
method. The MibSPIx module must be first brought out of its local reset to use the system module auto-initialization method.  
72  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.14 Vectored Interrupt Manager  
The vectored interrupt manager (VIM) provides hardware assistance for prioritizing and controlling the  
many interrupt sources present on this device. Interrupts are caused by events outside of the normal flow  
of program execution. Normally, these events require a timely response from the CPU; therefore, when an  
interrupt occurs, the CPU switches execution from the normal program flow to an interrupt service routine  
(ISR).  
6.14.1 VIM Features  
The VIM module has the following features:  
Supports 128 interrupt channels.  
Provides programmable priority and enable for interrupt request lines.  
Provides a direct hardware dispatch mechanism for fastest IRQ dispatch.  
Provides two software dispatch mechanisms when the CPU VIC port is not used.  
Index interrupt  
Register vectored interrupt  
Parity protected vector interrupt table against soft errors.  
6.14.2 Interrupt Request Assignments  
Table 6-27. Interrupt Request Assignments  
Modules  
Interrupt Sources  
Default VIM Interrupt  
Channel  
ESM  
Reserved  
RTI  
ESM High level interrupt (NMI)  
Reserved  
0
1
RTI compare interrupt 0  
RTI compare interrupt 1  
RTI compare interrupt 2  
RTI compare interrupt 3  
RTI overflow interrupt 0  
RTI overflow interrupt 1  
RTI time-base interrupt  
GIO interrupt A  
2
RTI  
3
RTI  
4
RTI  
5
RTI  
6
RTI  
7
RTI  
8
GIO  
9
N2HET1  
HET TU1  
MIBSPI1  
LIN  
N2HET1 level 0 interrupt  
HET TU1 level 0 interrupt  
MIBSPI1 level 0 interrupt  
LIN level 0 interrupt  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
MIBADC1  
MIBADC1  
DCAN1  
SPI2  
MIBADC1 event group interrupt  
MIBADC1 software group 1 interrupt  
DCAN1 level 0 interrupt  
SPI2 level 0 interrupt  
Reserved  
Reserved  
CRC  
CRC Interrupt  
ESM  
ESM low-level interrupt  
Software interrupt (SSI)  
PMU Interrupt  
SYSTEM  
CPU  
GIO  
GIO interrupt B  
N2HET1  
HET TU1  
MIBSPI1  
N2HET1 level 1 interrupt  
HET TU1 level 1 interrupt  
MIBSPI1 level 1 interrupt  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
73  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 6-27. Interrupt Request Assignments (continued)  
Modules  
Interrupt Sources  
Default VIM Interrupt  
Channel  
LIN  
LIN level 1 interrupt  
MIBADC1 software group 2 interrupt  
DCAN1 level 1 interrupt  
SPI2 level 1 interrupt  
MIBADC1 magnitude compare interrupt  
Reserved  
27  
MIBADC1  
DCAN1  
SPI2  
28  
29  
30  
MIBADC1  
Reserved  
DMA  
31  
32  
FTCA interrupt  
33  
DMA  
LFSA interrupt  
34  
DCAN2  
MIBSPI3  
MIBSPI3  
DMA  
DCAN2 level 0 interrupt  
MIBSPI3 level 0 interrupt  
MIBSPI3 level 1 interrupt  
HBCA interrupt  
35  
37  
38  
39  
DMA  
BTCA interrupt  
40  
Reserved  
DCAN2  
DCAN1  
DCAN3  
DCAN2  
FPU  
Reserved  
41  
DCAN2 level 1 interrupt  
DCAN1 IF3 interrupt  
DCAN3 level 0 interrupt  
DCAN2 IF3 interrupt  
FPU interrupt  
42  
44  
45  
46  
47  
Reserved  
SPI4  
Reserved  
48  
SPI4 level 0 interrupt  
MibADC2 event group interrupt  
MibADC2 software group1 interrupt  
Reserved  
49  
MIBADC2  
MIBADC2  
Reserved  
MIBSPI5  
SPI4  
50  
51  
52  
MIBSPI5 level 0 interrupt  
SPI4 level 1 interrupt  
DCAN3 level 1 interrupt  
MIBSPI5 level 1 interrupt  
MibADC2 software group2 interrupt  
Reserved  
53  
54  
DCAN3  
MIBSPI5  
MIBADC2  
Reserved  
MIBADC2  
DCAN3  
FMC  
55  
56  
57  
58  
MibADC2 magnitude compare interrupt  
DCAN3 IF3 interrupt  
FSM_DONE interrupt  
Reserved  
59  
60  
61  
Reserved  
N2HET2  
SCI  
62  
N2HET2 level 0 interrupt  
SCI level 0 interrupt  
HET TU2 level 0 interrupt  
I2C level 0 interrupt  
Reserved  
63  
64  
HET TU2  
I2C  
65  
66  
Reserved  
N2HET2  
SCI  
67–72  
73  
N2HET2 level 1 interrupt  
SCI level 1 interrupt  
HET TU2 level 1 interrupt  
Reserved  
74  
HET TU2  
Reserved  
HWAG1  
HWAG2  
DCC1  
75  
76–79  
80  
HWA_INT_REQ_H  
HWA_INT_REQ_H  
81  
DCC done interrupt  
DCC2 done interrupt  
82  
DCC2  
83  
74  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 6-27. Interrupt Request Assignments (continued)  
Modules  
Interrupt Sources  
Default VIM Interrupt  
Channel  
Reserved  
PBIST Controller  
Reserved  
Reserved  
PBIST Done Interrupt  
Reserved  
84  
85  
86-87  
88  
HWAG1  
HWA_INT_REQ_L  
HWA_INT_REQ_L  
ePWM1 Interrupt  
HWAG2  
89  
ePWM1INTn  
ePWM1TZINTn  
ePWM2INTn  
ePWM2TZINTn  
ePWM3INTn  
ePWM3TZINTn  
ePWM4INTn  
ePWM4TZINTn  
ePWM5INTn  
ePWM5TZINTn  
ePWM6INTn  
ePWM6TZINTn  
ePWM7INTn  
ePWM7TZINTn  
eCAP1INTn  
eCAP2INTn  
eCAP3INTn  
eCAP4INTn  
eCAP5INTn  
eCAP6INTn  
eQEP1INTn  
eQEP2INTn  
Reserved  
90  
ePWM1 Trip Zone Interrupt  
ePWM2 Interrupt  
91  
92  
ePWM2 Trip Zone Interrupt  
ePWM3 Interrupt  
93  
94  
ePWM3 Trip Zone Interrupt  
ePWM4 Interrupt  
95  
96  
ePWM4 Trip Zone Interrupt  
ePWM5 Interrupt  
97  
98  
ePWM5 Trip Zone Interrupt  
ePWM6 Interrupt  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112–127  
ePWM6 Trip Zone Interrupt  
ePWM7 Interrupt  
ePWM7 Trip Zone Interrupt  
eCAP1 Interrupt  
eCAP2 Interrupt  
eCAP3 Interrupt  
eCAP4 Interrupt  
eCAP5 Interrupt  
eCAP6 Interrupt  
eQEP1 Interrupt  
eQEP2 Interrupt  
Reserved  
NOTE  
Address location 0x00000000 in the VIM RAM is reserved for the phantom interrupt ISR  
entry; therefore only request channels 0..126 can be used and are offset by one address in  
the VIM RAM.  
NOTE  
The lower-order interrupt channels are higher priority channels than the higher-order interrupt  
channels.  
NOTE  
The application can change the mapping of interrupt sources to the interrupt channels  
through the interrupt channel control registers (CHANCTRLx) inside the VIM module.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
75  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.15 DMA Controller  
The DMA controller is used to transfer data between two locations in the memory map in the background  
of CPU operations. Typically, the DMA is used to:  
Transfer blocks of data between external and internal data memories  
Restructure portions of internal data memory  
Continually service a peripheral  
6.15.1 DMA Features  
CPU independent data transfer  
One 64-bit master port that interfaces to the TMS570 Memory System.  
FIFO buffer (four entries deep and each 64 bits wide)  
Channel control information is stored in RAM protected by parity  
16 channels with individual enable  
Channel chaining capability  
32 peripheral DMA requests  
Hardware and software DMA requests  
8-, 16-, 32- or 64-bit transactions supported  
Multiple addressing modes for source/destination (fixed, increment, offset)  
Auto-initiation  
Power-management mode  
Memory Protection with four configurable memory regions  
76  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.15.2 Default DMA Request Map  
The DMA module on this microcontroller has 16 channels and up to 32 hardware DMA requests. The  
module contains DREQASIx registers which are used to map the DMA requests to the DMA channels. By  
default, channel 0 is mapped to request 0, channel 1 to request 1, and so on.  
Some DMA requests have multiple sources, as shown in Table 6-28. The application must ensure that  
only one of these DMA request sources is enabled at any time.  
Table 6-28. DMA Request Line Connection  
Modules  
MIBSPI1  
DMA Request Sources  
MIBSPI1[1](1)  
DMA Request  
DMAREQ[0]  
DMAREQ[1]  
DMAREQ[2]  
DMAREQ[3]  
DMAREQ[4]  
DMAREQ[5]  
DMAREQ[6]  
DMAREQ[7]  
DMAREQ[8]  
DMAREQ[9]  
DMAREQ[10]  
DMAREQ[11]  
DMAREQ[12]  
DMAREQ[13]  
DMAREQ[14]  
DMAREQ[15]  
DMAREQ[16]  
DMAREQ[17]  
DMAREQ[18]  
DMAREQ[19]  
DMAREQ[20]  
MIBSPI1  
MIBSPI1[0](2)  
SPI2  
SPI2 receive  
SPI2  
SPI2 transmit  
MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3 / DCAN2  
MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3 / DCAN2  
DCAN1 / MIBSPI5  
MIBSPI1[2] / MIBSPI3[2] / DCAN2 IF3  
MIBSPI1[3] / MIBSPI3[3] / DCAN2 IF2  
DCAN1 IF2 / MIBSPI5[2]  
MIBADC1 / MIBSPI5  
MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3 / DCAN1  
MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3 / DCAN2  
MIBADC1 / I2C / MIBSPI5  
MIBADC1 / I2C / MIBSPI5  
RTI / MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3  
RTI / MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3  
MIBSPI3 / MibADC2 / MIBSPI5  
MIBSPI3 / MIBSPI5  
MIBADC1 event / MIBSPI5[3]  
MIBSPI1[4] / MIBSPI3[4] / DCAN1 IF1  
MIBSPI1[5] / MIBSPI3[5] / DCAN2 IF1  
MIBADC1 G1 / I2C receive / MIBSPI5[4]  
MIBADC1 G2 / I2C transmit / MIBSPI5[5]  
RTI DMAREQ0 / MIBSPI1[6] / MIBSPI3[6]  
RTI DMAREQ1 / MIBSPI1[7] / MIBSPI3[7]  
MIBSPI3[1](1) / MibADC2 event / MIBSPI5[6]  
MIBSPI3[0](2) / MIBSPI5[7]  
MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3 / DCAN1 / MibADC2  
MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3 / DCAN3 / MibADC2  
RTI / MIBSPI5  
MIBSPI1[8] / MIBSPI3[8] / DCAN1 IF3 / MibADC2 G1  
MIBSPI1[9] / MIBSPI3[9] / DCAN3 IF1 / MibADC2 G2  
RTI DMAREQ2 / MIBSPI5[8]  
RTI / MIBSPI5  
RTI DMAREQ3 / MIBSPI5[9]  
N2HET1 / N2HET2 / DCAN3  
N2HET1 DMAREQ[4] / N2HET2 DMAREQ[4] / DCAN3  
IF2  
N2HET1 / N2HET2 / DCAN3  
N2HET1 DMAREQ[5] / N2HET2 DMAREQ[5] / DCAN3  
IF3  
DMAREQ[21]  
MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3 / MIBSPI5  
MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3 / MIBSPI5  
MIBSPI1[10] / MIBSPI3[10] / MIBSPI5[10]  
MIBSPI1[11] / MIBSPI3[11] / MIBSPI5[11]  
DMAREQ[22]  
DMAREQ[23]  
DMAREQ[24]  
N2HET1 / N2HET2 / SPI4 / MIBSPI5  
N2HET1 DMAREQ[6] / N2HET2 DMAREQ[6] / SPI4  
receive / MIBSPI5[12]  
N2HET1 / N2HET2 / SPI4 / MIBSPI5  
N2HET1 DMAREQ[7] / N2HET2 DMAREQ[7] / SPI4  
transmit / MIBSPI5[13]  
DMAREQ[25]  
CRC / MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3  
CRC / MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3  
LIN / MIBSPI5  
CRC DMAREQ[0] / MIBSPI1[12] / MIBSPI3[12]  
CRC DMAREQ[1] / MIBSPI1[13] / MIBSPI3[13]  
LIN receive / MIBSPI5[14]  
DMAREQ[26]  
DMAREQ[27]  
DMAREQ[28]  
DMAREQ[29]  
DMAREQ[30]  
LIN / MIBSPI5  
LIN transmit / MIBSPI5[15]  
MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3 / SCI / MIBSPI5  
MIBSPI1[14] / MIBSPI3[14] / SCI receive /  
MIBSPI5[1](1)  
MIBSPI1 / MIBSPI3 / SCI / MIBSPI5  
MIBSPI1[15] / MIBSPI3[15] / SCI transmit /  
MIBSPI5[0](2)  
DMAREQ[31]  
(1) SPI1, SPI3, SPI5 receive when configured in standard SPI mode  
(2) SPI1, SPI3, SPI5 transmit when configured in standard SPI mode  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
77  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.16 Real-Time Interrupt Module  
The real-time interrupt (RTI) module provides timer functionality for operating systems and for  
benchmarking code. The RTI module can incorporate several counters that define the time bases needed  
for scheduling an operating system.  
The timers also let you benchmark certain areas of code by reading the values of the counters at the  
beginning and the end of the desired code range and calculating the difference between the values.  
6.16.1 Features  
The RTI module has the following features:  
Two independent 64-bit counter blocks  
Four configurable compares for generating operating system ticks or DMA requests. Each event can  
be driven by either counter block 0 or counter block 1.  
Fast enabling/disabling of events  
Two timestamp (capture) functions for system or peripheral interrupts, one for each counter block  
6.16.2 Block Diagrams  
Figure 6-11 shows a high-level block diagram for one of the two 64-bit counter blocks inside the RTI  
module. Both the counter blocks are identical except the Network Time Unit (NTUx) inputs are only  
available as time-base inputs for the counter block 0. Figure 6-12 shows the compare unit block diagram  
of the RTI module.  
31  
0
Compare  
up counter  
RTICPUCx  
OVLINTx  
31  
0
=
Up counter  
RTIUCx  
31  
0
RTICLK  
To Compare  
Unit  
Free-running counter  
RTIFRCx  
NTU0  
NTU1  
NTU2  
NTU3  
31  
0
31  
0
Capture  
up counter  
RTICAUCx  
Capture  
free-running counter  
RTICAFRCx  
CAP event source 0  
CAP event source 1  
External  
control  
Figure 6-11. Counter Block Diagram  
78  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
31  
Update  
compare  
0
RTIUDCPy  
+
31  
0
DMAREQy  
INTy  
Compare  
RTICOMPy  
From counter  
block 0  
=
From counter  
block 1  
Compare  
control  
Figure 6-12. Compare Block Diagram  
6.16.3 Clock Source Options  
The RTI module uses the RTI1CLK clock domain for generating the RTI time bases.  
The application can select the clock source for the RTI1CLK by configuring the RCLKSRC register in the  
system module at address 0xFFFFFF50. The default source for RTI1CLK is VCLK.  
For more information on clock sources, see Table 6-8 and Table 6-13.  
6.16.4 Network Time Synchronization Inputs  
The RTI module supports four Network Time Unit (NTU) inputs that signal internal system events, and  
which can be used to synchronize the time base used by the RTI module. On this device, these NTU  
inputs are connected as shown in Table 6-29.  
Table 6-29. Network Time Synchronization Inputs  
NTU INPUT  
SOURCE  
0
1
2
3
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
EXTCLKIN1 clock input  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
79  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.17 Error Signaling Module  
The Error Signaling Module (ESM) manages the various error conditions on the TMS570 microcontroller.  
The error condition is handled based on a fixed severity level assigned to it. Any severe error condition  
can be configured to drive a low level on a dedicated device terminal called nERROR. The nERROR can  
be used as an indicator to an external monitor circuit to put the system into a safe state.  
6.17.1 ESM Features  
The features of the ESM are:  
128 interrupt/error channels are supported, divided into three groups  
64 channels with maskable interrupt and configurable error pin behavior  
32 error channels with nonmaskable interrupt and predefined error pin behavior  
32 channels with predefined error pin behavior only  
Error pin to signal severe device failure  
Configurable time base for error signal  
Error forcing capability  
6.17.2 ESM Channel Assignments  
The ESM integrates all the device error conditions and groups them in the order of severity. Group1 is  
used for errors of the lowest severity while Group3 is used for errors of the highest severity. The device  
response to each error is determined by the severity group it is connected to. Table 6-31 lists the channel  
assignment for each group.  
Table 6-30. ESM Groups  
INFLUENCE ON ERROR  
ERROR GROUP  
INTERRUPT CHARACTERISTICS  
TERMINAL  
Configurable  
Fixed  
Group1  
Group2  
Group3  
Maskable, low or high priority  
Nonmaskable, high priority  
No interrupt generated  
Fixed  
Table 6-31. ESM Channel Assignments  
ERROR CONDITION  
GROUP  
CHANNELS  
Group1  
Reserved  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
MibADC2 - RAM parity error  
DMA - MPU configuration violation  
DMA - control packet RAM parity error  
Reserved  
DMA - error on DMA read access, imprecise error  
FMC - correctable ECC error: bus1 and bus2 interfaces  
(does not include accesses to Bank 7)  
Group1  
6
N2HET1 - RAM parity error  
HET TU1/HET TU2 - dual-control packet RAM parity error  
HET TU1/HET TU2 - MPU configuration violation  
PLL1 - Slip  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Clock Monitor - oscillator fail  
Reserved  
DMA - error on DMA write access, imprecise error  
Reserved  
VIM RAM - parity error  
Reserved  
80  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 6-31. ESM Channel Assignments (continued)  
ERROR CONDITION  
GROUP  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
CHANNELS  
MibSPI1 - RAM parity error  
MibSPI3 - RAM parity error  
MibADC1 - RAM parity error  
Reserved  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
DCAN1 - RAM parity error  
DCAN3 - RAM parity error  
DCAN2 - RAM parity error  
MibSPI5 - RAM parity error  
Reserved  
RAM even bank (B0TCM) - correctable ECC error  
CPU - self-test failed  
RAM odd bank (B1TCM) - correctable ECC error  
Reserved  
DCC1 - error  
CCM-R4 - self-test failed  
Reserved  
Reserved  
N2HET2 - RAM parity error  
FMC - correctable ECC error (Bank 7 access)  
FMC - uncorrectable ECC error (Bank 7 access)  
IOMM - Access to unimplemented location in IOMM frame, or write access  
detected in unprivileged mode  
Group1  
37  
Power domain controller compare error  
Power domain controller self-test error  
Group1  
Group1  
38  
39  
eFuse Controller Error – this error signal is generated when any bit in the eFuse  
controller error status register is set. The application can choose to generate an  
interrupt whenever this bit is set to service any eFuse controller error conditions.  
Group1  
Group1  
40  
41  
eFuse Controller - Self-Test Error. This error signal is generated only when a self-  
test on the eFuse controller generates an error condition. When an ECC self-test  
error is detected, group 1 channel 40 error signal will also be set.  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
81  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 6-31. ESM Channel Assignments (continued)  
ERROR CONDITION  
GROUP  
Group1  
Group1  
Group1  
CHANNELS  
Reserved  
61  
62  
63  
DCC2 - error  
Reserved  
Group2  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
Group2  
0
1
CCMR4 - dual-CPU lock-step error  
Reserved  
2
3
FMC - uncorrectable address parity error on accesses to main flash  
4
Reserved  
5
RAM even bank (B0TCM) - uncorrectable redundant address decode error  
6
Reserved  
7
RAM odd bank (B1TCM) - uncorrectable redundant address decode error  
8
Reserved  
9
RAM even bank (B0TCM) - address bus parity error  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
Reserved  
RAM odd bank (B1TCM) - address bus parity error  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
TCM - ECC live lock detect  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Windowed Watchdog (WWD) violation  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Group3  
Reserved  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
eFuse Farm - autoload error  
Reserved  
RAM even bank (B0TCM) - ECC uncorrectable error  
Reserved  
RAM odd bank (B1TCM) - ECC uncorrectable error  
Reserved  
FMC - uncorrectable ECC error: bus1 and bus2 interfaces  
(does not include address parity error and errors on accesses to Bank 7)  
Group3  
7
Reserved  
Reserved  
Group3  
Group3  
8
9
82  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 6-31. ESM Channel Assignments (continued)  
ERROR CONDITION  
GROUP  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
Group3  
CHANNELS  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
83  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.18 Reset/Abort/Error Sources  
Table 6-32. Reset/Abort/Error Sources  
ESM HOOKUP  
GROUP.CHANNE  
L
ERROR SOURCE  
CPU TRANSACTIONS  
CPUMODE  
ERROR RESPONSE  
Precise write error (NCNB/Strongly Ordered)  
Precise read error (NCB/Device or Normal)  
Imprecise write error (NCB/Device or Normal)  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
Precise Abort (CPU)  
Precise Abort (CPU)  
Imprecise Abort (CPU)  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Undefined Instruction Trap  
(CPU)(1)  
Illegal instruction  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
N/A  
N/A  
MPU access violation  
Abort (CPU)  
SRAM  
B0 TCM (even) ECC single error (correctable)  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
1.26  
3.3  
Abort (CPU), ESM =>  
B0 TCM (even) ECC double error (uncorrectable)  
nERROR  
B0 TCM (even) uncorrectable error (that is, redundant address  
decode)  
User/Privilege  
ESM => NMI => nERROR  
2.6  
B0 TCM (even) address bus parity error  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM => NMI => nERROR  
ESM  
2.10  
1.28  
B1 TCM (odd) ECC single error (correctable)  
Abort (CPU), ESM =>  
nERROR  
B1 TCM (odd) ECC double error (uncorrectable)  
User/Privilege  
3.5  
B1 TCM (odd) uncorrectable error (that is, redundant address  
decode)  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM => NMI => nERROR  
ESM => NMI => nERROR  
2.8  
B1 TCM (odd) address bus parity error  
2.12  
FLASH WITH CPU BASED ECC  
FMC correctable error - Bus1 and Bus2 interfaces (does not  
include accesses to Bank 7)  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
1.6  
3.7  
2.4  
FMC uncorrectable error - Bus1 and Bus2 accesses  
(does not include address parity error)  
Abort (CPU), ESM =>  
nERROR  
FMC uncorrectable error - address parity error on Bus1  
accesses  
ESM => NMI => nERROR  
FMC correctable error - Accesses to Bank 7  
FMC uncorrectable error - Accesses to Bank 7  
DMA TRANSACTIONS  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
ESM  
1.35  
1.36  
External imprecise error on read (Illegal transaction with ok  
response)  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
ESM  
1.5  
External imprecise error on write (Illegal transaction with ok  
response)  
1.13  
Memory access permission violation  
Memory parity error  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
ESM  
1.2  
1.3  
HET TU1 (HTU1)  
NCNB (Strongly Ordered) transaction with slave error response  
External imprecise error (Illegal transaction with ok response)  
Memory access permission violation  
Memory parity error  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
Interrupt => VIM  
Interrupt => VIM  
ESM  
N/A  
N/A  
1.9  
1.8  
ESM  
HET TU2 (HTU2)  
NCNB (Strongly Ordered) transaction with slave error response  
External imprecise error (Illegal transaction with ok response)  
Memory access permission violation  
Memory parity error  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
Interrupt => VIM  
Interrupt => VIM  
ESM  
N/A  
N/A  
1.9  
1.8  
ESM  
(1) The Undefined Instruction TRAP is not detectable outside the CPU. The trap is taken only if the instruction reaches the execute stage of  
the CPU.  
84  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 6-32. Reset/Abort/Error Sources (continued)  
ESM HOOKUP  
GROUP.CHANNE  
L
ERROR SOURCE  
CPUMODE  
ERROR RESPONSE  
N2HET1  
Memory parity error  
N2HET2  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
ESM  
1.7  
Memory parity error  
MIBSPI  
1.34  
MibSPI1 memory parity error  
MibSPI3 memory parity error  
MibSPI5 memory parity error  
MIBADC  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
ESM  
ESM  
1.17  
1.18  
1.24  
MibADC1 memory parity error  
MibADC2 memory parity error  
DCAN  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
ESM  
1.19  
1.1  
DCAN1 memory parity error  
DCAN2 memory parity error  
DCAN3 memory parity error  
PLL  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
ESM  
ESM  
1.21  
1.23  
1.22  
PLL slip error  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
ESM  
1.10  
1.11  
CLOCK MONITOR  
Clock monitor interrupt  
DCC  
DCC1 error  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
ESM  
1.30  
1.62  
DCC2 error  
CCM-R4  
Self-test failure  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
1.31  
2.2  
Compare failure  
ESM => NMI => nERROR  
VIM  
Memory parity error  
User/Privilege  
N/A  
ESM  
Reset  
ESM  
ESM  
1.15  
N/A  
VOLTAGE MONITOR  
VMON out of voltage range  
CPU SELF-TEST (LBIST)  
Cortex-R4F CPU self-test (LBIST) error  
PIN MULTIPLEXING CONTROL  
Mux configuration error  
POWER DOMAIN CONTROL  
PSCON compare error  
PSCON self-test error  
eFuse CONTROLLER  
eFuse Controller Autoload error  
eFuse Controller - Any bit set in the error status register  
eFuse Controller self-test error  
WINDOWED WATCHDOG  
WWD Nonmaskable Interrupt exception  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
1.27  
1.37  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM  
ESM  
1.38  
1.39  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
User/Privilege  
ESM => nERROR  
3.1  
ESM  
ESM  
1.40  
1.41  
N/A  
ESM => NMI => nERROR  
2.24  
ERRORS REFLECTED IN THE SYSESR REGISTER  
Power-Up Reset  
Oscillator fail / PLL slip(2)  
N/A  
N/A  
Reset  
Reset  
N/A  
N/A  
(2) Oscillator fail/PLL slip can be configured in the system register (SYS.PLLCTL1) to generate a reset.  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
85  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 6-32. Reset/Abort/Error Sources (continued)  
ESM HOOKUP  
GROUP.CHANNE  
L
ERROR SOURCE  
CPUMODE  
ERROR RESPONSE  
Watchdog exception  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Reset  
Reset  
Reset  
Reset  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
CPU Reset (driven by the CPU STC)  
Software Reset  
External Reset  
86  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.19 Digital Windowed Watchdog  
This device includes a Digital Windowed Watchdog (DWWD) module that protects against runaway code  
execution (see Figure 6-13).  
The DWWD module allows the application to configure the time window within which the DWWD module  
expects the application to service the watchdog. A watchdog violation occurs if the application services the  
watchdog outside of this window, or fails to service the watchdog at all. The application can choose to  
generate a system reset or an ESM group2 error signal in case of a watchdog violation.  
The watchdog is disabled by default and must be enabled by the application. Once enabled, the watchdog  
can only be disabled upon a system reset.  
Down  
Counter  
0
DWWD Preload  
100%  
Window  
íindow ꢀpen  
íindow ꢀpen  
=
Down Counter  
50%  
Window  
íindow ꢀpen  
íindow ꢀpen  
25%  
Window  
í ꢀpen  
ꢀp  
í ꢀpen  
ꢀp  
RESET  
12.5%  
Window  
5igital  
íindowed  
INTERRUPT  
ESM  
6.25%  
Window  
íatchdog  
3.125%  
Window  
Figure 6-13. Digital Windowed Watchdog Example  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
87  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.20 Debug Subsystem  
6.20.1 Block Diagram  
The device contains an ICEPICK module (version C) to allow JTAG access to the scan chains (see  
Figure 6-14).  
Boundary Scan  
Boundary Scan  
Interface  
BSR/BSDL  
Debug  
ROM1  
TRST  
TMS  
TCK  
RTCK  
TDI  
TDO  
Debug APB  
DAP  
Secondary Tap 0  
APB Mux  
AHB-AP  
APB slave  
Cortex  
R4F  
POM  
To  
SCR1  
From  
PCR Bridge  
through A2A  
Secondary Tap 2  
Test Tap 0  
AJSM  
eFuse Farm  
PSCON  
Test Tap 1  
Figure 6-14. Debug Subsystem Block Diagram  
6.20.2 Debug Components Memory Map  
Table 6-33. Debug Components Memory Map  
FRAME ADDRESS RANGE  
RESPONSE FOR ACCESS TO  
UNIMPLEMENTED LOCATIONS  
IN FRAME  
MODULE  
NAME  
FRAME CHIP  
SELECT  
FRAME ACTUAL  
SIZE  
SIZE  
START  
END  
CoreSight Debug ROM  
Cortex-R4F Debug  
CSCS0  
CSCS1  
0xFFA0_0000  
0xFFA0_1000  
0xFFA0_0FFF  
0xFFA0_1FFF  
4KB  
4KB  
4KB  
4KB  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
Reads return zeros, writes have no effect  
6.20.3 JTAG Identification Code  
The JTAG ID code for this device is the same as the device ICEPick Identification Code. For the JTAG ID  
Code per silicon revision, see Table 6-34.  
Table 6-34. JTAG ID Code  
SILICON REVISION  
Rev 0  
ID  
0x0BB0302F  
0x1BB0302F  
Rev A  
88  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.20.4 Debug ROM  
The Debug ROM stores the location of the components on the Debug APB bus (see Table 6-35).  
Table 6-35. Debug ROM Table  
ADDRESS  
0x000  
DESCRIPTION  
Pointer to Cortex-R4F  
Reserved  
VALUE  
0x0000 1003  
0x0000 2002  
0x0000 3002  
0x0000 4003  
0x0000 0000  
0x001  
0x002  
Reserved  
0x003  
Reserved  
0x004  
end of table  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
89  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.20.5 JTAG Scan Interface Timings  
Table 6-36. JTAG Scan Interface Timing(1)  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
MAX  
UNIT  
MHz  
MHz  
ns  
fTCK  
TCK frequency (at HCLKmax)  
RTCK frequency (at TCKmax and HCLKmax)  
Delay time, TCK to RTCK  
12  
fRTCK  
10  
1
2
3
4
5
td(TCK -RTCK)  
24  
12  
tsu(TDI/TMS - RTCKr) Setup time, TDI, TMS before RTCK rise (RTCKr)  
26  
0
ns  
th(RTCKr -TDI/TMS)  
th(RTCKr -TDO)  
td(TCKf -TDO)  
Hold time, TDI, TMS after RTCKr  
Hold time, TDO after RTCKf  
ns  
0
ns  
Delay time, TDO valid after RTCK fall (RTCKf)  
ns  
(1) Timings for TDO are specified for a maximum of 50-pF load on TDO.  
TCK  
RTCK  
1
1
TMS  
TDI  
2
3
TDO  
4
5
Figure 6-15. JTAG Timing  
90  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
6.20.6 Advanced JTAG Security Module  
This device includes a an Advanced JTAG Security Module (AJSM) module. The AJSM provides  
maximum security to the memory content of the device by letting users secure the device after  
programming.  
Flash Module Output  
OTP Contents  
(example)  
. . .  
. . .  
H
L
H
L
H
L
L
H
Unlock By Scan  
Register  
H
H
L
L
Internal Tie-Offs  
(example only)  
L
L
H
H
UNLOCK  
128-bit comparator  
Internal Tie-Offs  
(example only)  
H
L
L
H
H
L
L
H
Figure 6-16. AJSM Unlock  
The device is unsecure by default by virtue of a 128-bit visible unlock code programmed in the OTP  
address 0xF0000000. The OTP contents are XOR-ed with the contents of the "Unlock By Scan" register.  
The outputs of these XOR gates are again combined with a set of secret internal tie-offs. The output of  
this combinational logic is compared against a secret hard-wired 128-bit value. A match results in the  
UNLOCK signal being asserted, so that the device is now unsecure.  
A user can secure the device by changing at least 1 bit in the visible unlock code from 1 to 0. Changing a  
0 to 1 is not possible because the visible unlock code is stored in the One Time Programmable (OTP)  
flash region. Also, changing all 128 bits to zeros is not a valid condition and will permanently secure the  
device.  
Once secured, a user can unsecure the device by scanning an appropriate value into the "Unlock By  
Scan" register of the AJSM module. This register is accessible by configuring an IR value of 0b1011 on  
the AJSM TAP. The value to be scanned is such that the XOR of the OTP contents and the Unlock-By-  
Scan register contents results in the original visible unlock code.  
The Unlock-By-Scan register is reset only upon asserting power-on reset (nPORRST).  
A secure device only permits JTAG accesses to the AJSM scan chain through the Secondary Tap 2 of the  
ICEPick module. All other secondary taps, test taps, and the boundary scan interface are not accessible in  
this state.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
91  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
6.20.7 Boundary Scan Chain  
The device supports BSDL-compliant boundary scan for testing pin-to-pin compatibility. The boundary  
scan chain is connected to the Boundary Scan Interface of the ICEPICK module (see Figure 6-17).  
Device Pins (conceptual)  
TRST  
TMS  
TCK  
TDI  
Boundary  
Scan  
Boundary Scan Interface  
TDO  
RTCK  
TDI  
TDO  
BSDL  
Figure 6-17. Boundary Scan Implementation (Conceptual Diagram)  
Data is serially shifted into all boundary-scan buffers through TDI, and out through TDO.  
92  
System Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
7 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
7.1 I/O Timings  
7.1.1 Input Timings  
tpw  
VCCIO  
Input  
VIH  
VIH  
VIL  
VIL  
0
Figure 7-1. TTL-Level Inputs  
Table 7-1. Timing Requirements for Inputs(1)  
MIN  
tc(VCLK) + 10(2)  
MAX  
UNIT  
ns  
tpw  
Input minimum pulse width  
tin_slew  
Time for input signal to go from VIL to VIH or from VIH to VIL  
1
ns  
(1) tc(VCLK) = peripheral VBUS clock cycle time = 1 / f(VCLK)  
(2) The timing shown above is only valid for pin used in general-purpose input mode.  
7.1.2 Output Timings  
Table 7-2. Switching Characteristics for Output Timings versus Load Capacitance (CL)  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
MAX  
2.5  
4
UNIT  
CL = 15 pF  
CL = 50 pF  
CL = 100 pF  
CL = 150 pF  
CL = 15 pF  
CL = 50 pF  
CL = 100 pF  
CL = 150 pF  
CL = 15 pF  
CL = 50 pF  
CL = 100 pF  
CL = 150 pF  
CL = 15 pF  
CL= 50 pF  
Rise time, tr  
Fall time, tf  
Rise time, tr  
Fall time, tf  
Rise time, tr  
Fall time, tf  
7.2  
12.5  
2.5  
4
8 mA low-EMI pins  
(see Table 4-40)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
7.2  
12.5  
5.6  
10.4  
16.8  
23.2  
5.6  
10.4  
16.8  
23.2  
8
4 mA low-EMI pins  
(see Table 4-40)  
CL = 100 pF  
CL = 150 pF  
CL = 15 pF  
CL = 50 pF  
CL = 100 pF  
CL = 150 pF  
CL = 15 pF  
CL = 50 pF  
CL = 100 pF  
CL = 150 pF  
15  
23  
33  
2 mA-z low-EMI pins  
(see Table 4-40)  
8
15  
23  
33  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
93  
 
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 7-2. Switching Characteristics for Output Timings versus Load Capacitance (CL) (continued)  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
MAX  
2.5  
4
UNIT  
CL = 15 pF  
CL = 50 pF  
CL = 100 pF  
CL = 150 pF  
CL = 15 pF  
CL = 50 pF  
CL = 100 pF  
CL = 150 pF  
CL = 15 pF  
CL = 50 pF  
CL = 100 pF  
CL = 150 pF  
CL = 15 pF  
CL = 50 pF  
CL = 100 pF  
CL = 150 pF  
Rise time, tr  
Fall time, tf  
Rise time, tr  
Fall time, tf  
7.2  
12.5  
2.5  
4
8mA mode  
7.2  
12.5  
8
Selectable 8 mA / 2 mA-z pins  
(see Table 4-40)  
ns  
15  
23  
33  
8
2mA-z mode  
15  
23  
33  
tr  
t
f
VCCIO  
Output  
VOH  
VOH  
VOL  
VOL  
0
Figure 7-2. CMOS-Level Outputs  
Table 7-3. Timing Requirements for Outputs(1)  
MIN  
MAX  
UNIT  
Delay between low-to-high, or high-to-low transition of general-purpose output  
signals that can be configured by an application in parallel, for example, all signals in  
a GIOA port, or all N2HET1 signals, and so forth  
td(parallel_out)  
6
ns  
(1) This specification does not account for any output buffer drive strength differences or any external capacitive loading differences. Check  
Table 4-40 for output buffer drive strength information on each signal.  
94  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
7.1.2.1 Low-EMI Output Buffers  
The low-EMI output buffer has been designed explicitly to address the issue of decoupling sources of  
emissions from the pins which they drive. This is accomplished by adaptively controlling the output buffer  
impedance, and is particularly effective with capacitive loads.  
This is not the default mode of operation of the low-EMI output buffers and must be enabled by setting the  
system module GPCR1 register for the desired module or signal, as shown in Table 7-4. The adaptive  
impedance control circuit monitors the DC bias point of the output signal. The buffer internally generates  
two reference levels, VREFLOW and VREFHIGH, which are set to approximately 10% and 90% of  
VCCIO, respectively.  
Once the output buffer has driven the output to a low level, if the output voltage is below VREFLOW, then  
the impedance of the output buffer will increase to Hi-Z. A high degree of decoupling between the internal  
ground bus and the output pin will occur with capacitive loads, or any load in which no current is flowing,  
for example, the buffer is driving low on a resistive path to ground. Current loads on the buffer which try to  
pull the output voltage above VREFLOW will be opposed by the impedance of the output buffer so as to  
maintain the output voltage at or below VREFLOW.  
Conversely, once the output buffer has driven the output to a high level, if the output voltage is above  
VREFHIGH then the output buffer impedance will again increase to Hi-Z. A high degree of decoupling  
between internal power bus ad output pin will occur with capacitive loads or any loads in which no current  
is flowing, for example, buffer is driving high on a resistive path to VCCIO. Current loads on the buffer  
which try to pull the output voltage below VREFHIGH will be opposed by the output buffer impedance so  
as to maintain the output voltage at or above VREFHIGH.  
The bandwidth of the control circuitry is relatively low, so that the output buffer in adaptive impedance  
control mode cannot respond to high-frequency noise coupling into the power buses of the buffer. In this  
manner, internal bus noise approaching 20% peak-to-peak of VCCIO can be rejected.  
Unlike standard output buffers which clamp to the rails, an output buffer in impedance control mode will  
allow a positive current load to pull the output voltage up to VCCIO + 0.6V without opposition. Also, a  
negative current load will pull the output voltage down to VSSIO – 0.6V without opposition. This is not an  
issue because the actual clamp current capability is always greater than the IOH / IOL specifications.  
The low-EMI output buffers are automatically configured to be in the standard buffer mode when the  
device enters a low-power mode.  
Table 7-4. Low-EMI Output Buffer Hookup  
LOW-EMI OUTPUT BUFFER SIGNAL HOOKUP  
MODULE or SIGNAL NAME  
LOW-POWER MODE (LPM)  
STANDARD BUFFER ENABLE (SBEN)  
GPREG1.0  
Module: MibSPI1  
Reserved  
GPREG1.1  
GPREG1.2  
GPREG1.3  
GPREG1.4  
GPREG1.5  
GPREG1.6  
GPREG1.7  
GPREG1.8  
GPREG1.9  
GPREG1.10  
GPREG1.11  
GPREG1.12  
GPREG1.13  
GPREG1.14  
Module: MibSPI3  
Reserved  
Module: MibSPI5  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
LPM signal from SYS module  
Signal: TMS  
Reserved  
Signal: TDO  
Signal: RTCK  
Reserved  
Signal: nERROR  
Reserved  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
95  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.2 Enhanced PWM Modules (ePWM)  
Figure 7-3 shows the connections between the seven ePWM modules (ePWM1–ePWM7) on the device.  
PINMMR36[25]  
NHET1_LOOP_SYNC  
EPWMSYNCI  
EPWM1A  
EPWM1TZINTn  
EPWM1INTn  
VIM  
VIM  
EPWM1B  
TZ1/2/3n  
Mux  
Selector  
SOCA1, SOCB1  
ADC Wrapper  
EPWM1  
VBus32  
EQEP1ERR / EQEP2ERR /  
EQEP1ERR or EQEP2ERR  
OSC FAIL or PLL Slip  
EQEP1 + EQEP2  
System Module  
CPU  
TZ4n  
VCLK4, SYS_nRST  
EPWM1ENCLK  
TBCLKSYNC  
TZ5n  
TZ6n  
Debug Mode Entry  
EPWM2/3/4/5/6A  
EPWM2/3/4/5/6B  
EPWM2/3/4/5/6TZINTn  
EPWM2/3/4/5/6INTn  
VIM  
VIM  
TZ1/2/3n  
ADC Wrapper  
Mux  
Selector  
SOCA2/3/4/5/6  
SOCB2/3/4/5/6  
EPWM  
2/3/4/5/6  
VBus32  
EQEP1ERR / EQEP2ERR /  
EQEP1ERR or EQEP2ERR  
OSC FAIL or PLL Slip  
EQEP1 + EQEP2  
System Module  
CPU  
TZ4n  
VCLK4, SYS_nRST  
EPWM2/3/4/5/6ENCLK  
TBCLKSYNC  
TZ5n  
TZ6n  
Debug Mode Entry  
EPWM7A  
EPWM7TZINTn  
EPWM7INTn  
VIM  
VIM  
EPWM7B  
TZ1/2/3n  
Mux  
Selector  
SOCA7, SOCB7  
ADC Wrapper  
EPWM  
7
VBus32  
EQEP1ERR / EQEP2ERR /  
EQEP1ERR or EQEP2ERR  
OSC FAIL or PLL SLip  
EQEP1 + EQEP2  
System Module  
CPU  
TZ4n  
TZ5n  
TZ6n  
VCLK4, SYS_nRST  
EPWM7ENCLK  
TBCLKSYNC  
Debug Mode Entry  
Pulse  
Stretch,  
8 VCLK4  
cycles  
EPWMSYNCO  
ECAP1  
VBus32 / VBus32DP  
ECAP  
1
ECAP1INTn  
VIM  
A. For more detail on the input synchronization selection of the TZ1/TZ2/TZ3n pins to each ePWMx module, see  
Figure 7-4.  
Figure 7-3. ePWMx Module Interconnections  
Figure 7-4 shows the detailed input synchronization selection (asynchronous, double-synchronous, or  
double-synchronous + filter width) for ePWMx.  
96  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
TZxn  
(x = 1, 2, or 3)  
double  
sync  
ePWMx  
(x = 1 through 7)  
6 VCLK4  
Cycles Filter  
Figure 7-4. ePWMx Input Synchronization Selection Detail  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
97  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.2.1 ePWM Clocking and Reset  
Each ePWM module has a clock enable (EPWMxENCLK). When SYS_nRST is active-low, the clock  
enables are ignored and the ePWM logic is clocked so that it can reset to a proper state. When  
SYS_nRST goes in-active high, the state of clock enable is respected.  
Table 7-5. ePWMx Clock Enable Control  
CONTROL REGISTER TO  
ePWM MODULE INSTANCE  
DEFAULT VALUE  
ENABLE CLOCK  
PINMMR37[8]  
PINMMR37[16]  
PINMMR37[24]  
PINMMR38[0]  
PINMMR38[8]  
PINMMR38[16]  
PINMMR38[24]  
ePWM1  
ePWM2  
ePWM3  
ePWM4  
ePWM5  
ePWM6  
ePWM7  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The default value of the control registers to enable the clocks to the ePWMx modules is 1. This means  
that the VCLK4 clock connections to the ePWMx modules are enabled by default. The application can  
choose to gate off the VCLK4 clock to any ePWMx module individually by clearing the respective control  
register bit.  
7.2.2 Synchronization of ePWMx Time-Base Counters  
A time-base synchronization scheme connects all of the ePWM modules on a device. Each ePWM  
module has a synchronization input (EPWMxSYNCI) and a synchronization output (EPWMxSYNCO). The  
input synchronization for the first instance (ePWM1) comes from an external pin. Figure 7-3 shows the  
synchronization connections for all the ePWMx modules. Each ePWM module can be configured to use or  
ignore the synchronization input. For more information, see the ePWM chapter in the device-specific  
Technical Reference Manual (TRM).  
7.2.3 Synchronizing all ePWM Modules to the N2HET1 Module Time Base  
The connection between the N2HET1_LOOP_SYNC and SYNCI input of ePWM1 module is implemented  
as shown in Figure 7-5.  
N2HET1_LOOP_SYNC  
EXT_LOOP_SYNC  
N2HET1  
N2HET2  
ePWM1  
2 VCLK4 cycles  
Pulse Stretch  
SYNCI  
EPWM1SYNCI  
double  
sync  
PINMMR36[25]  
6 VCLK4  
Cycles Filter  
PINMMR47[8,9,10]  
Figure 7-5. Synchronizing Time Bases Between N2HET1, N2HET2 and ePWMx Modules  
98  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
7.2.4 Phase-Locking the Time-Base Clocks of Multiple ePWM Modules  
The TBCLKSYNC bit can be used to globally synchronize the time-base clocks of all enabled ePWM  
modules on a device. This bit is implemented as PINMMR37 register bit 1.  
When TBCLKSYNC = 0, the time-base clock of all ePWM modules is stopped. This is the default  
condition.  
When TBCLKSYNC = 1, all ePWM time-base clocks are started with the rising edge of TBCLK aligned.  
For perfectly synchronized TBCLKs, the prescaler bits in the TBCTL register of each ePWM module must  
be set identically. The proper procedure for enabling the ePWM clocks is as follows:  
1. Enable the individual ePWM module clocks (if disable) using the control registers shown in Table 7-5.  
2. Configure TBCLKSYNC = 0. This will stop the time-base clock within any enabled ePWM module.  
3. Configure the prescaler values and desired ePWM modes.  
4. Configure TBCLKSYNC = 1.  
7.2.5 ePWM Synchronization with External Devices  
The output sync from the ePWM1 module is also exported to a device output terminal so that multiple  
devices can be synchronized together. The signal pulse is stretched by eight VCLK4 cycles before being  
exported on the terminal as the EPWM1SYNCO signal.  
7.2.6 ePWM Trip Zones  
7.2.6.1 Trip Zones TZ1n, TZ2n, TZ3n  
These three trip zone inputs are driven by external circuits and are connected to device-level inputs.  
These signals are either connected asynchronously to the ePWMx trip zone inputs, or double-  
synchronized with VCLK4, or double-synchronized and then filtered with a 6-cycle VCLK4-based counter  
before connecting to the ePWMx (see Figure 7-4). By default, the trip zone inputs are asynchronously  
connected to the ePWMx modules.  
Table 7-6. Connection to ePWMx Modules for Device-Level Trip Zone Inputs  
CONTROL FOR  
CONTROL FOR  
ASYNCHRONOUS  
CONNECTION TO ePWMx  
CONTROL FOR  
DOUBLE-SYNCHRONIZED  
CONNECTION TO ePWMx  
TRIP ZONE  
INPUT  
DOUBLE-SYNCHRONIZED AND  
FILTERED CONNECTION TO  
ePWMx(1)  
TZ1n  
TZ2n  
TZ3n  
PINMMR46[18:16] = 001  
PINMMR46[26:24] = 001  
PINMMR47[2:0] = 001  
PINMMR46[18:16] = 010  
PINMMR46[26:24] = 010  
PINMMR47[2:0] = 010  
PINMMR46[18:16] = 100  
PINMMR46[26:24] = 100  
PINMMR47[2:0] = 100  
(1) The filter width is 6 VCLK4 cycles.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
99  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.2.6.2 Trip Zone TZ4n  
This trip zone input is dedicated to eQEPx error indications. There are two eQEP modules on this device.  
Each eQEP module indicates a phase error by driving its EQEPxERR output High. The following control  
registers allow the application to configure the trip zone input (TZ4n) to each ePWMx module based on  
the requirements of the application.  
Table 7-7. TZ4n Connections for ePWMx Modules  
CONTROL FOR TZ4n =  
NOT(EQEP1ERR OR EQEP2ERR)  
CONTROL FOR TZ4n =  
NOT(EQEP1ERR)  
CONTROL FOR TZ4n =  
NOT(EQEP2ERR)  
ePWMx  
ePWM1  
ePWM2  
ePWM3  
ePWM4  
ePWM5  
ePWM6  
ePWM7  
PINMMR41[2:0] = 001  
PINMMR41[10:8] = 001  
PINMMR41[18:16] = 001  
PINMMR41[26:24] = 001  
PINMMR42[2:0] = 001  
PINMMR42[10:8] = 001  
PINMMR42[18:16] = 001  
PINMMR41[2:0] = 010  
PINMMR41[2:0] = 100  
PINMMR41[10:8] = 010  
PINMMR41[18:16] = 010  
PINMMR41[26:24] = 010  
PINMMR42[2:0] = 010  
PINMMR42[10:8] = 010  
PINMMR42[18:16] = 010  
PINMMR41[10:8] = 100  
PINMMR41[18:16] = 100  
PINMMR41[26:24] = 100  
PINMMR42[2:0] = 100  
PINMMR42[10:8] = 100  
PINMMR42[18:16] = 100  
7.2.6.3 Trip Zone TZ5n  
This trip zone input is dedicated to a clock failure on the device. That is, this trip zone input is asserted  
whenever an oscillator failure or a PLL slip is detected on the device. The application can use this trip  
zone input for each ePWMx module to prevent the external system from going out of control when the  
device clocks are not within expected range (system running at limp clock).  
The oscillator failure and PLL slip signals used for this trip zone input are taken from the status flags in the  
system module. These level signals are set until cleared by the application.  
7.2.6.4 Trip Zone TZ6n  
This trip zone input to the ePWMx modules is dedicated to a debug mode entry of the CPU. If enabled,  
the user can force the PWM outputs to a known state when the emulator stops the CPU. This prevents the  
external system from going out of control when the CPU is stopped.  
7.2.7 Triggering of ADC Start of Conversion Using ePWMx SOCA and SOCB Outputs  
A special scheme is implemented to select the actual signal used for triggering the start of conversion on  
the two ADCs on this device. This scheme is defined in Section 7.5.2.3.  
100  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
7.2.8 Enhanced Translator-Pulse Width Modulator (ePWMx) Timings  
Table 7-8. ePWMx Timing Requirements  
TEST CONDITIONS  
MIN  
2 tc(VCLK4)  
MAX UNIT  
Asynchronous  
tw(SYNCIN)  
Synchronization input pulse width  
Synchronous  
2 tc(VCLK4)  
cycles  
Synchronous, with input filter  
2 tc(VCLK4) + filter width(1)  
(1) The filter width is 6 VCLK4 cycles  
Table 7-9. ePWMx Switching Characteristics  
TEST  
CONDITIONS  
PARAMETER  
Pulse duration, ePWMx output high or low  
MIN  
MAX  
UNIT  
tw(PWM)  
33.33  
ns  
tw(SYNCOUT)  
Synchronization Output Pulse Width  
8 tc(VCLK4)  
cycles  
Delay time, trip input active to PWM forced high, or  
Delay time, trip input active to PWM forced low  
td(PWM)tza  
No pin load  
25  
20  
ns  
ns  
td(TZ-PWM)HZ  
Delay time, trip input active to PWM Hi-Z  
Table 7-10. ePWMx Trip-Zone Timing Requirements  
TEST CONDITIONS  
MIN  
MAX UNIT  
2 * HSPCLKDIV * CLKDIV *  
Asynchronous  
(1)  
tc(VCLK4)  
tw(TZ)  
Pulse duration, TZn input low  
cycles  
Synchronous  
2 tc(VCLK4)  
Synchronous, with input filter  
2 tc(VCLK4) + filter width  
(1) For more information on the clock divider fields: HSPCLKDIV and CLKDIV, see the ePWM chapter of the device-specific Technical  
Reference Manual (TRM).  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
101  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.3 Enhanced Capture Modules (eCAP)  
Figure 7-6 shows how the eCAP modules are interconnected on this microcontroller.  
EPWM1SYNCO  
ECAP1SYNCI  
ECAP1  
ECAP1INTn  
ECAP1  
VIM  
VBus32  
VCLK4, SYS_nRST  
ECAP1ENCLK  
ECAP1SYNCO  
ECAP2SYNCI  
ECAP2  
ECAP  
2/3/4/5  
ECAP2INTn  
VIM  
VBus32  
VCLK4, SYS_nRST  
ECAP2ENCLK  
ECAP2SYNCO  
ECAP6  
ECAP  
6
VBus32  
VIM  
ECAP6INTn  
VCLK4, SYS_nRST  
ECAP6ENCLK  
A. For more detail on the input synchronization selection of the ECAPx pins to each eCAPx module, see Figure 7-7.  
Figure 7-6. eCAPx Module Connections  
Figure 7-7 shows the detailed input synchronization selection (asynchronous, double-synchronous, or  
double-synchronous + filter width) for eCAPx.  
102  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
ECAPx  
(x = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6)  
double  
sync  
eCAPx  
6 VCLK4  
Cycles Filter  
(x = 1 through 6)  
Figure 7-7. eCAPx Input Synchronization Selection Detail  
7.3.1 Clock Enable Control for eCAPx Modules  
Each of the eCAPx modules have a clock enable (ECAPxENCLK). These signals must be generated from  
a device-level control register. When SYS_nRST is active-low, the clock enables are ignored and the  
ECAPx logic is clocked so that it can reset to a proper state. When SYS_nRST goes in-active high, the  
state of clock enable is respected.  
Table 7-11. eCAPx Clock Enable Control  
CONTROL REGISTER TO  
eCAP MODULE INSTANCE  
DEFAULT VALUE  
ENABLE CLOCK  
PINMMR39[0]  
PINMMR39[8]  
PINMMR39[16]  
PINMMR39[24]  
PINMMR40[0]  
PINMMR40[8]  
eCAP1  
eCAP2  
eCAP3  
eCAP4  
eCAP5  
eCAP6  
1
1
1
1
1
1
The default value of the control registers to enable the clocks to the eCAPx modules is 1. This means that  
the VCLK4 clock connections to the eCAPx modules are enabled by default. The application can choose  
to gate off the VCLK4 clock to any eCAPx module individually by clearing the respective control register  
bit.  
7.3.2 PWM Output Capability of eCAPx  
When not used in capture mode, each of the eCAPx modules can be used as a single-channel PWM  
output. This is called the Auxiliary PWM (APWM) mode of operation of the eCAPx modules. For more  
information, see the eCAP module chapter of the device-specific TRM.  
7.3.3 Input Connection to eCAPx Modules  
The input connection to each of the eCAPx modules can be selected between a double-VCLK4-  
synchronized input or a double-VCLK4-synchronized and filtered input, as shown in Table 7-12.  
Table 7-12. Device-Level Input Connection to eCAPx Modules  
CONTROL FOR  
CONTROL FOR  
INPUT SIGNAL  
DOUBLE-SYNCHRONIZED  
CONNECTION TO eCAPx  
DOUBLE-SYNCHRONIZED AND  
FILTERED CONNECTION TO eCAPx(1)  
eCAP1  
eCAP2  
eCAP3  
eCAP4  
eCAP5  
eCAP6  
PINMMR43[2:0] = 001  
PINMMR43[2:0] = 010  
PINMMR43[10:8] = 001  
PINMMR43[18:16] = 001  
PINMMR43[26:24] = 001  
PINMMR44[2:0] = 001  
PINMMR44[10:8] = 001  
PINMMR43[10:8] = 010  
PINMMR43[18:16] = 010  
PINMMR43[26:24] = 010  
PINMMR44[2:0] = 010  
PINMMR44[10:8] = 010  
(1) The filter width is 6 VCLK4 cycles.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
103  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.3.4 Enhanced Capture Module (eCAP) Electrical Data/Timing  
Table 7-13. eCAPx Timing Requirements  
TEST CONDITIONS  
MIN  
2 tc(VCLK4)  
2 tc(VCLK4) + filter width(1)  
MAX  
UNIT  
Synchronous  
tw(CAP)  
Pulse width, capture input  
cycles  
Synchronous with input filter  
(1) The filter width is 6 VCLK4 cycles.  
Table 7-14. eCAPx Switching Characteristics  
PARAMETER  
TEST CONDITIONS  
MIN  
MAX UNIT  
tw(APWM)  
Pulse duration, APWMx output high or low  
20  
ns  
104  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
7.4 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder (eQEP)  
Figure 7-8 shows the eQEP module interconnections on the device.  
VBus32  
EQEP1A  
EQEP1B  
EQEP1ENCLK  
VCLK4  
SYS_nRST  
EQEP1I  
EQEP1IO  
EQEP1IOE  
EQEP1  
Module  
EPWM1/../7  
EQEP1INTn  
VIM  
EQEP1ERR  
EQEP1S  
EQEP1SO  
EQEP1SOE  
IO  
Mux  
VBus32  
EQEP2A  
EQEP2B  
EQEP2ENCLK  
VCLK4  
SYS_nRST  
EQEP2I  
EQEP2IO  
EQEP2IOE  
EQEP2  
Module  
EQEP2INTn  
VIM  
Connection  
Selection  
Mux  
EQEP2ERR  
EQEP2S  
EQEP2SO  
EQEP2SOE  
A. For more detail on the eQEP input synchronization selection of the EQEPxA/B pins to each eQEPx module, see  
Figure 7-9.  
Figure 7-8. eQEP Module Interconnections  
Figure 7-9 shows the detailed input synchronization selection (asynchronous, double-synchronous, or  
double-synchronous + filter width) for eQEPx.  
EQEPxA or EQEPxB  
(x = 1 or 2)  
double  
sync  
eQEPx  
6 VCLK4  
Cycles Filter  
(x = 1 or 2)  
Figure 7-9. eQEPx Input Synchronization Selection Detail  
7.4.1 Clock Enable Control for eQEPx Modules  
Device-level control registers are implemented to generate the EQEPxENCLK signals. When SYS_nRST  
is active-low, the clock enables are ignored and the eQEPx logic is clocked so that it can reset to a proper  
state. When SYS_nRST goes in-active high, the state of clock enable is respected.  
The default value of the control registers to enable the clocks to the eQEPx modules is 1 (see Table 7-15).  
This means that the VCLK4 clock connections to the eQEPx modules are enabled by default. The  
application can choose to gate off the VCLK4 clock to any eQEPx module individually by clearing the  
respective control register bit.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
105  
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 7-15. eQEPx Clock Enable Control  
CONTROL REGISTER TO  
ENABLE CLOCK  
eQEP MODULE INSTANCE  
DEFAULT VALUE  
eQEP1  
eQEP2  
PINMMR40[16]  
PINMMR40[24]  
1
1
7.4.2 Using eQEPx Phase Error to Trip ePWMx Outputs  
The eQEP module sets the EQEPERR signal output whenever a phase error is detected in its inputs  
EQEPxA and EQEPxB. This error signal from both the eQEP modules is input to the connection selection  
multiplexer. This multiplexer is defined in Table 7-7. As shown in Figure 7-3, the output of this selection  
multiplexer is inverted and connected to the TZ4n trip-zone input of all EPWMx modules. This connection  
allows the application to define the response of each ePWMx module on a phase error indicated by the  
eQEP modules.  
7.4.3 Input Connections to eQEPx Modules  
The input connections to each of the eQEP modules can be selected between a double-VCLK4-  
synchronized input or a double-VCLK4-synchronized and filtered input, as shown in Table 7-16.  
Table 7-16. Device-Level Input Connection to eQEPx Modules  
CONTROL FOR  
CONTROL FOR  
INPUT SIGNAL  
DOUBLE-SYNCHRONIZED  
CONNECTION TO eQEPx  
DOUBLE-SYNCHRONIZED AND  
FILTERED CONNECTION TO eQEPx(1)  
eQEP1A  
eQEP1B  
eQEP1I  
eQEP1S  
eQEP2A  
eQEP2B  
eQEP2I  
eQEP2S  
PINMMR44[18:16] = 001  
PINMMR44[18:16] = 010  
PINMMR44[26:24] = 001  
PINMMR45[2:0] = 001  
PINMMR45[10:8] = 001  
PINMMR45[18:16] = 001  
PINMMR45[26:24] = 001  
PINMMR46[2:0] = 001  
PINMMR46[10:8] = 001  
PINMMR44[26:24] = 010  
PINMMR45[2:0] = 010  
PINMMR45[10:8] = 010  
PINMMR45[18:16] = 010  
PINMMR45[26:24] = 010  
PINMMR46[2:0] = 010  
PINMMR46[10:8] = 010  
(1) The filter width is 6 VCLK4 cycles.  
7.4.4 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEPx) Timing  
Table 7-17. eQEPx Timing Requirements(1)  
TEST CONDITIONS  
MIN  
2 tc(VCLK4)  
MAX UNIT  
tw(QEPP)  
QEP input period  
Synchronous  
cycles  
Synchronous with input filter  
Synchronous  
2 tc(VCLK4) + filter width  
2 tc(VCLK4)  
tw(INDEXH)  
tw(INDEXL)  
tw(STROBH)  
tw(STROBL)  
QEP Index Input High Time  
QEP Index Input Low Time  
QEP Strobe Input High Time  
QEP Strobe Input Low Time  
cycles  
cycles  
cycles  
cycles  
Synchronous with input filter  
Synchronous  
2 tc(VCLK4) + filter width  
2 tc(VCLK4)  
Synchronous with input filter  
Synchronous  
2 tc(VCLK4) + filter width  
2 tc(VCLK4)  
Synchronous with input filter  
Synchronous  
2 tc(VCLK4) + filter width  
2 tc(VCLK4)  
Synchronous with input filter  
2 tc(VCLK4) + filter width  
(1) The filter width is 6 VCLK4 cycles.  
106  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 7-18. eQEPx Switching Characteristics  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
MAX  
4 tc(VCLK4)  
6 tc(VCLK4)  
UNIT  
cycles  
cycles  
td(CNTR)xin  
Delay time, external clock to counter increment  
Delay time, QEP input edge to position compare sync output  
td(PCS-OUT)QEP  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
107  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.5 12-Bit Multibuffered Analog-to-Digital Converter (MibADC)  
The MibADC has a separate power bus for its analog circuitry that enhances the Analog-to-Digital (A-to-D)  
performance by preventing digital switching noise on the logic circuitry which could be present on VSS and  
VCC from coupling into the A-to-D analog stage. All A-to-D specifications are given with respect to  
ADREFLO, unless otherwise noted.  
Table 7-19. MibADC Overview  
DESCRIPTION  
Resolution  
VALUE  
12 bits  
Assured  
Monotonic  
Output conversion code  
00h to 3FFh [00 for VAI ADREFLO; 3FFh for VAI ADREFHI]  
7.5.1 Features  
12-bit resolution  
ADREFHI and ADREFLO pins (high and low reference voltages)  
Total Sample/Hold/Convert time: 600 ns Minimum at 30 MHz ADCLK  
One memory region per conversion group is available (Event Group, Group 1, and Group 2)  
Allocation of channels to conversion groups is completely programmable  
Supports flexible channel conversion order  
Memory regions are serviced either by interrupt or by DMA  
Programmable interrupt threshold counter is available for each group  
Programmable magnitude threshold interrupt for each group for any one channel  
Option to read either 8-, 10-, or 12-bit values from memory regions  
Single or continuous conversion modes  
Embedded self-test  
Embedded calibration logic  
Enhanced power-down mode  
Optional feature to automatically power down ADC core when no conversion is in progress  
External event pin (ADxEVT) programmable as general-purpose I/O  
7.5.2 Event Trigger Options  
The ADC module supports three conversion groups: Event Group, Group1, and Group2. Each of these  
three groups can be configured to be triggered by a hardware event. In that case, the application can  
select the trigger, from among eight event sources, to convert a group.  
7.5.2.1 MibADC1 Event Trigger Hookup  
Table 7-20 lists the event sources that can trigger the conversions for the MibADC1 groups.  
108  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 7-20. MibADC1 Event Trigger Hookup  
TRIGGER EVENT SIGNAL  
GROUP SOURCE SELECT  
(G1SRC, G2SRC, OR EVSRC)  
PINMMR30[0] = 0 AND PINMMR30[1] = 1  
EVENT NO.  
PINMMR30[0] = 1  
(DEFAULT)  
CONTROL FOR  
OPTION B  
CONTROL FOR  
OPTION B  
OPTION A  
AD1EVT  
OPTION A  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
1
2
3
4
5
6
AD1EVT  
N2HET1[8]  
N2HET1[10]  
AD1EVT  
ePWM_B  
PINMMR30[8] = 0 and  
PINMMR30[9] = 1  
N2HET2[5]  
N2HET1[27]  
PINMMR30[8] = 1  
N2HET1[27]  
ePWM_A1  
N2HET1[17]  
N2HET2[1]  
PINMMR30[16] = 0 and  
PINMMR30[17] = 1  
RTI Compare 0 Interrupt RTI Compare 0 Interrupt  
PINMMR30[16] = 1  
N2HET1[12]  
N2HET1[14]  
N2HET1[17]  
N2HET1[19]  
PINMMR30[24] = 0 and  
PINMMR30[25] = 1  
PINMMR30[24] = 1  
PINMMR31[0] = 0 and  
PINMMR31[1] = 1  
110  
111  
7
8
GIOB[0]  
GIOB[1]  
N2HET1[11]  
N2HET2[13]  
PINMMR31[0] = 1  
PINMMR32[16] = 1  
ePWM_A2  
ePWM_AB  
PINMMR31[8] = 0 and  
PINMMR31[9] = 1  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
109  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
NOTE  
If ADEVT, N2HET1, or GIOB is used as a trigger source, the connection to the MibADC1  
module trigger input is made from the output side of the input buffer. This way, a trigger  
condition can be generated either by configuring the function as output onto the pad (through  
the mux control), or by driving the function from an external trigger source as input. If the  
mux control module is used to select different functionality instead of the ADEVT, N2HET1[x]  
or GIOB[x] signals, then care must be taken to disable these signals from triggering  
conversions; there is no multiplexing on the input connections.  
If ePWM_B, ePWM_A2, ePWM_AB, N2HET2[1], N2HET2[5], N2HET2[13], N2HET1[11],  
N2HET1[17], or N2HET1[19] is used to trigger the ADC, the connection to the ADC is made  
directly from the N2HET or ePWM module outputs. As a result, the ADC can be triggered  
without having to enable the signal from being output on a device terminal.  
NOTE  
For the RTI compare 0 interrupt source, the connection is made directly from the output of  
the RTI module. That is, the interrupt condition can be used as a trigger source even if the  
actual interrupt is not signaled to the CPU.  
7.5.2.2 MibADC2 Event Trigger Hookup  
Table 7-21 lists the event sources that can trigger the conversions for the MibADC2 groups.  
110  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 7-21. MibADC2 Event Trigger Hookup  
TRIGGER EVENT SIGNAL  
GROUP SOURCE SELECT  
(G1SRC, G2SRC, OR EVSRC)  
PINMMR30[0] = 0 and PINMMR30[1] = 1  
EVENT NO.  
PINMMR30[0] = 1  
(DEFAULT)  
CONTROL FOR  
OPTION B  
CONTROL FOR  
OPTION B  
OPTION A  
AD2EVT  
OPTION A  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
1
2
3
4
5
6
AD2EVT  
N2HET1[8]  
N2HET1[10]  
AD2EVT  
ePWM_B  
PINMMR31[16] = 0 and  
PINMMR31[17] = 1  
N2HET2[5]  
N2HET1[27]  
PINMMR31[16] = 1  
N2HET1[27]  
ePWM_A1  
N2HET1[17]  
N2HET2[1]  
PINMMR31[24] = 0 and  
PINMMR31[25] = 1  
RTI Compare 0 Interrupt RTI Compare 0 Interrupt  
PINMMR31[24] = 1  
N2HET1[12]  
N2HET1[14]  
N2HET1[17]  
N2HET1[19]  
PINMMR32[0] = 0 and  
PINMMR32[1] = 1  
PINMMR32[0] = 1  
PINMMR32[8] = 0 and  
PINMMR32[9] = 1  
110  
111  
7
8
GIOB[0]  
GIOB[1]  
N2HET1[11]  
N2HET2[13]  
PINMMR32[8] = 1  
PINMMR32[16] = 1  
ePWM_A2  
ePWM_AB  
PINMMR32[16] = 0 and  
PINMMR32[17] = 1  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
111  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Notes  
If AD2EVT, N2HET1, or GIOB is used as a trigger source, the connection to the MibADC2  
module trigger input is made from the output side of the input buffer. This way, a trigger  
condition can be generated either by configuring the function as output onto the pad (through  
the mux control), or by driving the function from an external trigger source as input. If the  
mux control module is used to select different functionality instead of the AD2EVT,  
N2HET1[x] or GIOB[x] signals, then care must be taken to disable these signals from  
triggering conversions; there is no multiplexing on the input connections.  
If ePWM_B, ePWM_A2, ePWM_AB, N2HET2[1], N2HET2[5], N2HET2[13], N2HET1[11],  
N2HET1[17], or N2HET1[19] is used to trigger the ADC, the connection to the ADC is made  
directly from the N2HET or ePWM module outputs. As a result, the ADC can be triggered  
without having to enable the signal from being output on a device terminal.  
NOTE  
For the RTI compare 0 interrupt source, the connection is made directly from the output of  
the RTI module. That is, the interrupt condition can be used as a trigger source even if the  
actual interrupt is not signaled to the CPU.  
7.5.2.3 Controlling ADC1 and ADC2 Event Trigger Options Using SOC Output from ePWM Modules  
As shown in Figure 7-10, the ePWMxSOCA and ePWMxSOCB outputs from each ePWM module are  
used to generate four signals – ePWM_B, ePWM_A1, ePWM_A2, and ePWM_AB, that are available to  
trigger the ADC based on the application requirement.  
112  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
SOCAEN, SOCBEN bits  
inside ePWMx modules  
Controlled by PINMMR  
EPWM1SOCA  
EPWM1  
module  
EPWM1SOCB  
EPWM2SOCA  
EPWM2SOCB  
EPWM2  
module  
EPWM3SOCA  
EPWM3SOCB  
EPWM3  
module  
EPWM4SOCA  
EPWM4SOCB  
EPWM4  
module  
EPWM5SOCA  
EPWM5SOCB  
EPWM5  
module  
EPWM6SOCA  
EPWM6SOCB  
EPWM6  
module  
EPWM7SOCA  
EPWM7SOCB  
EPWM7  
module  
ePWM_B ePWM_A1 ePWM_A2 ePWM_AB  
Figure 7-10. ADC Trigger Source Generation from ePWMx  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
113  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 7-22. Control Bit to SOC Output  
CONTROL BIT  
PINMMR35[0]  
PINMMR35[8]  
PINMMR35[16]  
PINMMR35[24]  
PINMMR36[0]  
PINMMR36[8]  
PINMMR36[16]  
SOC OUTPUT  
SOC1A_SEL  
SOC2A_SEL  
SOC3A_SEL  
SOC4A_SEL  
SOC5A_SEL  
SOC6A_SEL  
SOC7A_SEL  
The SOCA output from each ePWM module is connected to a "switch" shown in Figure 7-10. This switch  
is implemented by using the control registers in the PINMMR module. Figure 7-11 shows an example of  
the implementation for the switch on SOC1A. The switches on the other SOCA signals are implemented in  
the same way.  
0
0
1
SOC1A  
ePWM1  
PINMMR164[0]  
EPWM1SOCA  
From switch on  
SOC2A  
when PINMMR164[8] = 1  
0
0
1
From switch on  
SOC2A  
when PINMMR164[8] = 0  
Figure 7-11. ePWM1SOC1A Switch Implementation  
The logic equations ( Equation 1, Equation 2, Equation 3, and Equation 4) for the four outputs from the  
combinational logic shown in Figure 7-10 are:  
ePWM_B = SOC1B or SOC2B or SOC3B or SOC4B or SOC5B or SOC6B or SOC7B  
ePWM_A1 = [ SOC1A and not(SOC1A_SEL) ] or [ SOC2A and not(SOC2A_SEL) ] or [ SOC3A and not(SOC3A_SEL) ] or  
[ SOC4A and not(SOC4A_SEL) ] or [ SOC5A and not(SOC5A_SEL) ] or [ SOC6A and not(SOC6A_SEL) ] or  
[ SOC7A and not(SOC7A_SEL) ]  
(1)  
(2)  
ePWM_A2 = [ SOC1A and SOC1A_SEL ] or [ SOC2A and SOC2A_SEL ] or [ SOC3A and SOC3A_SEL ] or  
[ SOC4A and SOC4A_SEL ] or [ SOC5A and SOC5A_SEL ] or [ SOC6A and SOC6A_SEL ] or  
[ SOC7A and SOC7A_SEL ]  
(3)  
(4)  
ePWM_AB = ePWM_B or ePWM_A2  
114  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
 
 
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
7.5.3 ADC Electrical and Timing Specifications  
Table 7-23. MibADC Recommended Operating Conditions  
PARAMETER  
A-to-D high-voltage reference source  
MIN  
MAX  
UNIT  
V
(1)  
ADREFHI  
ADREFLO  
VAI  
ADREFLO  
VCCAD  
(1)  
A-to-D low-voltage reference source  
VSSAD  
ADREFHI  
ADREFHI  
2
V
Analog input voltage  
Analog input clamp current(2) (VAI < VSSAD – 0.3 or VAI > VCCAD + 0.3)  
ADREFLO  
–2  
V
IAIC  
mA  
(1) For VCCAD and VSSAD recommended operating conditions, see Section 5.4.  
(2) Input currents into any ADC input channel outside the specified limits could affect conversion results of other channels.  
Table 7-24. MibADC Electrical Characteristics Over Full Ranges of Recommended Operating Conditions  
PARAMETER  
DESCRIPTION/CONDITIONS  
MIN  
MAX UNIT  
Rmux  
Rsamp  
Cmux  
Csamp  
Analog input mux on-resistance  
ADC sample switch on-resistance  
Input mux capacitance  
See Figure 7-12  
See Figure 7-12  
See Figure 7-12  
See Figure 7-12  
250  
250  
16  
13  
200  
200  
500  
250  
250  
1000  
2
Ω
Ω
pF  
pF  
ADC sample capacitance  
V
SSAD VIN < VSSAD + 100 mV  
–300  
–200  
–200  
–1000  
–250  
–250  
–8  
VCCAD = 3.6 V  
maximum  
IAIL  
Analog off-state input leakage current  
Analog off-state input leakage current  
ADC1 Analog on-state input bias current  
ADC2 Analog on-state input bias current  
ADC1 Analog on-state input bias current  
ADC2 Analog on-state input bias current  
VSSAD + 100 mV VIN VCCAD – 200 mV  
VCCAD – 200 mV < VIN VCCAD  
nA  
nA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
VSSAD VIN < VSSAD + 300 mV  
VCCAD = 5.25 V  
maximum  
IAIL  
VSSAD + 300 mV VIN VCCAD – 300 mV  
VCCAD – 300 mV < VIN VCCAD  
VSSAD VIN < VSSAD + 100 mV  
VCCAD = 3.6 V  
maximum  
(1)  
(1)  
(1)  
(1)  
IAOSB1  
IAOSB2  
IAOSB1  
IAOSB2  
VSSAD + 100 mV < VIN < VCCAD – 200 mV  
VCCAD – 200 mV < VIN < VCCAD  
–4  
2
–4  
12  
2
VSSAD VIN < VSSAD + 100 mV  
–7  
VCCAD = 3.6 V  
maximum  
VSSAD + 100 mV VIN VCCAD – 200 mV  
VCCAD - 200 mV < VIN VCCAD  
–4  
2
–4  
10  
3
VSSAD VIN < VSSAD + 300 mV  
–10  
5  
VCCAD = 5.25 V  
maximum  
VSSAD + 300 mV VIN VCCAD – 300 mV  
VCCAD – 300 mV < VIN VCCAD  
3
–5  
14  
3
VSSAD VIN < VSSAD + 300 mV  
–8  
VCCAD = 5.25 V  
maximum  
VSSAD + 300 mV VIN VCCAD – 300 mV  
VCCAD – 300 mV < VIN VCCAD  
–5  
3
–5  
12  
3
IADREFHI  
ICCAD  
ADREFHI input current  
Static supply current  
ADREFHI = VCCAD, ADREFLO = VSSAD  
Normal operating mode  
mA  
mA  
µA  
15  
5
ADC core in power down mode  
(1) If a shared channel is being converted by both ADC converters at the same time, the on-state leakage is equal to IAOSB1 + IAOSB2  
.
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
115  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Rext  
Pin  
Rmux  
Smux  
VS1  
IAOSB  
Cext  
On-State  
Bias Current  
Smux  
Rext  
Pin  
Rmux  
VS2  
IAIL  
Cext  
IAIL  
IAIL  
Off-State  
Leakages  
Smux  
Rext  
Pin  
Rmux  
Ssamp  
Rsamp  
VS24  
IAIL  
Csamp  
Cmux  
Cext  
IAIL  
IAIL  
Figure 7-12. MibADC Input Equivalent Circuit  
Table 7-25. MibADC Timing Specifications  
PARAMETER  
MIN NOM  
MAX UNIT  
(1)  
tc(ADCLK)  
Cycle time, MibADC clock  
0.033  
µs  
µs  
µs  
(2)  
td(SH)  
Delay time, sample and hold time  
Delay time from ADC power on until first input can be sampled  
12-BIT MODE  
0.2  
1
td(PU-ADV)  
td(C)  
Delay time, conversion time  
0.4  
0.6  
µs  
µs  
(3)  
td(SHC)  
Delay time, total sample/hold and conversion time  
10-BIT MODE  
td(C)  
Delay time, conversion time  
0.33  
0.53  
µs  
µs  
(3)  
td(SHC)  
Delay time, total sample/hold and conversion time  
(1) The MibADC clock is the ADCLK, generated by dividing down the VCLK by a prescale factor defined by the ADCLOCKCR register  
bits 4:0.  
(2) The sample and hold time for the ADC conversions is defined by the ADCLK frequency and the AD<GP>SAMP register for each  
conversion group. The sample time must be determined by accounting for the external impedance connected to the input channel as  
well as the internal impedance of the ADC.  
(3) This is the minimum sample/hold and conversion time that can be achieved. These parameters are dependent on many factors (for  
example, the prescale settings).  
116  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 7-26. MibADC Operating Characteristics Over Full Ranges of Recommended Operating  
Conditions(1)(2)  
PARAMETER  
DESCRIPTION/CONDITIONS  
ADREFHI – ADREFLO  
MIN NOM MAX UNIT  
Conversion range over which  
specified accuracy is maintained  
CR  
3
5.25  
V
10-bit mode  
12-bit mode  
10-bit mode  
1
2
2
Difference between the first ideal transition (from  
code 000h to 001h) and the actual transition  
ZSET  
Zero Scale Offset  
LSB  
Difference between the range of the measured  
code transitions (from first to last) and the range of  
the ideal code transitions  
FSET  
EDNL  
EINL  
Full Scale Offset  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
12-bit mode  
3
10-bit mode  
12-bit mode  
10-bit mode  
± 1.5  
± 2  
Difference between the actual step width and the  
ideal value (see Figure 7-13).  
Differential nonlinearity error  
Integral nonlinearity error  
Total unadjusted error  
Maximum deviation from the best straight line  
through the MibADC. MibADC transfer  
characteristics, excluding the quantization error.  
± 2  
12-bit mode  
± 2  
10-bit mode  
12-bit mode  
± 2  
± 4  
Maximum value of the difference between an  
analog value and the ideal midstep value.  
ETOT  
(1) 1 LSB = (ADREFHI – ADREFLO)/ 212 for 12-bit mode  
(2) 1 LSB = (ADREFHI – ADREFLO)/ 210 for 10-bit mode  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
117  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.5.4 Performance (Accuracy) Specifications  
7.5.4.1 MibADC Nonlinearity Errors  
The differential nonlinearity error shown in Figure 7-13 (sometimes referred to as differential linearity) is  
the difference between an actual step width and the ideal value of 1 LSB.  
0 ... 110  
0 ... 101  
0 ... 100  
0 ... 011  
Differential Linearity  
Error (–½ LSB)  
1 LSB  
0 ... 010  
Differential Linearity  
Error (–½ LSB)  
0 ... 001  
0 ... 000  
1 LSB  
0
1
2
3
4
5
Analog Input Value (LSB)  
A. 1 LSB = (ADREFHI – ADREFLO)/212  
Figure 7-13. Differential Nonlinearity (DNL) Error(A)  
118  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
The integral nonlinearity error shown in Figure 7-14 (sometimes referred to as linearity error) is the  
deviation of the values on the actual transfer function from a straight line.  
0 ... 111  
0 ... 110  
Ideal  
Transition  
0 ... 101  
0 ... 100  
0 ... 011  
0 ... 010  
0 ... 001  
0 ... 000  
Actual  
Transition  
At Transition  
011/100  
(–½ LSB)  
End-Point Lin. Error  
At Transition  
001/010 (–1/4 LSB)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Analog Input Value (LSB)  
A. 1 LSB = (ADREFHI – ADREFLO)/212  
Figure 7-14. Integral Nonlinearity (INL) Error(A)  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
119  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.5.4.2 MibADC Total Error  
The absolute accuracy or total error of an MibADC as shown in Figure 7-15 is the maximum value of the  
difference between an analog value and the ideal midstep value.  
0 ... 111  
0 ... 110  
0 ... 101  
0 ... 100  
Total Error  
At Step 0 ... 101  
(–1 1/4 LSB)  
0 ... 011  
0 ... 010  
Total Error  
At Step  
0 ... 001 (1/2 LSB)  
0 ... 001  
0 ... 000  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Analog Input Value (LSB)  
A. 1 LSB = (ADREFHI – ADREFLO)/212  
Figure 7-15. Absolute Accuracy (Total) Error(A)  
120  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
7.6 General-Purpose Input/Output  
The GPIO module on this device supports two ports, GIOA and GIOB. The I/O pins are bidirectional and  
bit-programmable. Both GIOA and GIOB support external interrupt capability.  
7.6.1 Features  
The GPIO module has the following features:  
Each I/O pin can be configured as:  
Input  
Output  
Open drain  
The interrupts have the following characteristics:  
Programmable interrupt detection either on both edges or on a single edge (set in GIOINTDET)  
Programmable edge-detection polarity, either rising or falling edge (set in GIOPOL register)  
Individual interrupt flags (set in GIOFLG register)  
Individual interrupt enables, set and cleared through GIOENASET and GIOENACLR registers,  
respectively  
Programmable interrupt priority, set through GIOLVLSET and GIOLVLCLR registers  
Internal pullup/pulldown allows unused I/O pins to be left unconnected  
For information on input and output timings see Section 7.1.1 and Section 7.1.2.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
121  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.7 Enhanced High-End Timer (N2HET)  
The N2HET is an advanced intelligent timer that provides sophisticated timing functions for real-time  
applications. The timer is software-controlled, using a reduced instruction set, with a specialized timer  
micromachine and an attached I/O port. The N2HET can be used for pulse width modulated outputs,  
capture or compare inputs, or general-purpose I/O. The N2HET is especially well suited for applications  
requiring multiple sensor information and drive actuators with complex and accurate time pulses.  
7.7.1 Features  
The N2HET module has the following features:  
Programmable timer for input and output timing functions  
Reduced instruction set (30 instructions) for dedicated time and angle functions  
160 words of instruction RAM protected by parity  
User-defined number of 25-bit virtual counters for timer, event counters, and angle counters  
7-bit hardware counters for each pin allow up to 32-bit resolution in conjunction with the 25-bit virtual  
counters  
Up to 32 pins usable for input signal measurements or output signal generation  
Programmable suppression filter for each input pin with adjustable limiting frequency  
Low CPU overhead and interrupt load  
Efficient data transfer to or from the CPU memory with dedicated High-End-Timer Transfer Unit (HTU)  
or DMA  
Diagnostic capabilities with different loopback mechanisms and pin status readback functionality  
7.7.2 N2HET RAM Organization  
The timer RAM uses four RAM banks, where each bank has two port access capability. This means that  
one RAM address may be written while another address is read. The RAM words are 96 bits wide, which  
are split into three 32-bit fields (program, control, and data).  
7.7.3 Input Timing Specifications  
The N2HET instructions PCNT and WCAP impose some timing constraints on the input signals.  
1
N2HETx  
3
4
2
Figure 7-16. N2HET Input Capture Timings  
122  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 7-27. Dynamic Characteristics for the N2HET Input Capture Functionality  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
MAX UNIT  
Input signal period, PCNT or WCAP for rising edge to  
rising edge  
1
2
3
4
(HRP) (LRP) tc(VCLK2) + 2 225 (HRP) (LRP) tc(VCLK2) – 2  
(HRP) (LRP) tc(VCLK2) + 2 225 (HRP) (LRP) tc(VCLK2) – 2  
2 (HRP) tc(VCLK2) + 2 225 (HRP) (LRP) tc(VCLK2) – 2  
2 (HRP) tc(VCLK2) + 2 225 (HRP) (LRP) tc(VCLK2) – 2  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Input signal period, PCNT or WCAP for falling edge to  
falling edge  
Input signal high phase, PCNT or WCAP for rising edge  
to falling edge  
Input signal low phase, PCNT or WCAP for falling edge  
to rising edge  
7.7.4 N2HET1 to N2HET2 Synchronization  
In some applications the N2HET resolutions must be synchronized. Some other applications require a  
single time base to be used for all PWM outputs and input timing captures.  
The N2HET provides such a synchronization mechanism. The Clk_master/slave (HETGCR.16) configures  
the N2HET in master or slave mode (default is slave mode). An N2HET in master mode provides a signal  
to synchronize the prescalers of the slave N2HET. The slave N2HET synchronizes its loop resolution to  
the loop resolution signal sent by the master. The slave does not require this signal after it receives the  
first synchronization signal. However, anytime the slave receives the resynchronization signal from the  
master, the slave must synchronize itself again.  
N2HET1  
N2HET2  
NHET_LOOP_SYNC  
EXT_LOOP_SYNC  
NHET_LOOP_SYNC  
EXT_LOOP_SYNC  
Figure 7-17. N2HET1 to N2HET2 Synchronization Hookup  
7.7.5 N2HET Checking  
7.7.5.1 Internal Monitoring  
To assure correctness of the high-end timer operation and output signals, the two N2HET modules can be  
used to monitor each other’s signals, as shown in Figure 7-18. The direction of the monitoring is controlled  
by the I/O multiplexing control module.  
IOMM mux control signal x  
N2HET1[1,3,5,7,9,11]  
N2HET1[1,3,5,7,9,11] / N2HET2[8,10,12,14,16,18]  
N2HET1  
N2HET2[8,10,12,14,16,18]  
N2HET2  
Figure 7-18. N2HET Monitoring  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
123  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.7.5.2 Output Monitoring Using Dual Clock Comparator (DCC)  
N2HET1[31] is connected as a clock source for counter 1 in DCC1. This allows the application to measure  
the frequency of the PWM signal on N2HET1[31].  
Similarly, N2HET2[0] is connected as a clock source for counter 1 in DCC2. This allows the application to  
measure the frequency of the PWM signal on N2HET2[0].  
Both N2HET1[31] and N2HET2[0] can be configured to be internal-only channels. That is, the connection  
to the DCC module is made directly from the output of the N2HETx module (from the input of the output  
buffer).  
For more information on DCC, see Section 6.7.3.  
7.7.6 Disabling N2HET Outputs  
Some applications require disabling the N2HET outputs under some fault condition. The N2HET module  
provides this capability through the Pin Disable input signal. This signal, when driven low, causes the  
N2HET outputs identified by a programmable register (HETPINDIS) to be in a high-impedance (tri-state)  
state. For more details on the N2HET Pin Disable feature, see the device-specific Terminal Reference  
Manual.  
GIOA[5] is connected to the Pin Disable input for N2HET1, and GIOB[2] is connected to the Pin Disable  
input for N2HET2.  
124  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
7.7.7 High-End Timer Transfer Unit (HET)  
A High-End Timer Transfer Unit (HTU) can perform DMA type transactions to transfer N2HET data to or  
from main memory. A Memory Protection Unit (MPU) is built into the HET TU.  
7.7.7.1 Features  
CPU and DMA independent  
Master port to access system memory  
8 control packets supporting dual buffer configuration  
Control packet information is stored in RAM protected by parity  
Event synchronization (HET transfer requests)  
Supports 32- or 64-bit transactions  
Addressing modes for HET address (8- or 16-byte) and system memory address (fixed, 32- or 64-bit)  
One shot, circular, and auto-switch buffer transfer modes  
Request lost detection  
7.7.7.2 Trigger Connections  
For the transfer request line trigger connections to the N2HET TU when an instruction-specific condition is  
true, see Table 7-28 and Table 7-29.  
Table 7-28. HET TU1 Request Line Connection  
MODULES  
N2HET1  
N2HET1  
N2HET1  
N2HET1  
N2HET1  
N2HET1  
N2HET1  
N2HET1  
REQUEST SOURCE  
HTUREQ[0]  
HTUREQ[1]  
HTUREQ[2]  
HTUREQ[3]  
HTUREQ[4]  
HTUREQ[5]  
HTUREQ[6]  
HTUREQ[7]  
HET TU1 REQUEST  
HET TU1 DCP[0]  
HET TU1 DCP[1]  
HET TU1 DCP[2]  
HET TU1 DCP[3]  
HET TU1 DCP[4]  
HET TU1 DCP[5]  
HET TU1 DCP[6]  
HET TU1 DCP[7]  
Table 7-29. HET TU2 Request Line Connection  
MODULES  
REQUEST SOURCE  
HTUREQ[0]  
HTUREQ[1]  
HTUREQ[2]  
HTUREQ[3]  
HTUREQ[4]  
HTUREQ[5]  
HTUREQ[6]  
HTUREQ[7]  
HET TU2 REQUEST  
N2HET2  
N2HET2  
N2HET2  
N2HET2  
N2HET2  
N2HET2  
N2HET2  
N2HET2  
HET TU2 DCP[0]  
HET TU2 DCP[1]  
HET TU2 DCP[2]  
HET TU2 DCP[3]  
HET TU2 DCP[4]  
HET TU2 DCP[5]  
HET TU2 DCP[6]  
HET TU2 DCP[7]  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
125  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.8 Controller Area Network (DCAN)  
The DCAN supports the CAN 2.0B protocol standard and uses a serial, multimaster communication  
protocol that efficiently supports distributed real-time control with robust communication rates of up to 1  
Mbps. The DCAN is ideal for applications operating in noisy and harsh environments (for example,  
automotive and industrial fields) that require reliable serial communication or multiplexed wiring.  
7.8.1 Features  
Features of the DCAN module include:  
Supports CAN protocol version 2.0 part A, B  
Bit rates up to 1 Mbps  
The CAN kernel can be clocked by the oscillator for baud-rate generation.  
64 mailboxes on each DCAN  
Individual identifier mask for each message object  
Programmable FIFO mode for message objects  
Programmable loop-back modes for self-test operation  
Automatic bus on after Bus-Off state by a programmable 32-bit timer  
Message RAM protected by parity  
Direct access to message RAM during test mode  
CAN RX and TX pins configurable as general-purpose I/O pins  
Message RAM Auto Initialization  
DMA support  
For more information on the DCAN, see the device-specific TRM.  
7.8.2 Electrical and Timing Specifications  
Table 7-30. Dynamic Characteristics for the DCANx TX and RX Pins  
PARAMETER  
Delay time, transmit shift register to CANnTX pin(1)  
MIN  
MAX  
15  
UNIT  
ns  
td(CANnTX)  
td(CANnRX)  
Delay time, CANnRX pin to receive shift register  
5
ns  
(1) These values do not include the rise and fall times of the output buffer.  
126  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
7.9 Local Interconnect Network Interface (LIN)  
The SCI/LIN module can be programmed to work either as an SCI or as a LIN. The core of the module is  
an SCI. The hardware features of the SCI are augmented to achieve LIN compatibility.  
The SCI module is a universal asynchronous receiver-transmitter that implements the standard nonreturn  
to zero (NRZ) format. The SCI can be used to communicate, for example, through an RS-232 port or over  
a K-line.  
The LIN standard is based on the SCI (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter [UART]) serial data  
link format. The communication concept is single-master/multiple-slave with a message identification for  
multicast transmission between any network nodes.  
7.9.1 LIN Features  
The following are features of the LIN module:  
Compatible to LIN 1.3, 2.0 and 2.1 protocols  
Multibuffered receive and transmit units DMA capability for minimal CPU intervention  
Identification masks for message filtering  
Automatic Master Header Generation  
Programmable Synch Break Field  
Synch Field  
Identifier Field  
Slave Automatic Synchronization  
Synch break detection  
Optional baudrate update  
Synchronization Validation  
231 programmable transmission rates with 7 fractional bits  
Error detection  
2 interrupt lines with priority encoding  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
127  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.10 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)  
7.10.1 Features  
Standard UART communication  
Supports full- or half-duplex operation  
Standard NRZ format  
Double-buffered receive and transmit functions  
Configurable frame format of 3 to 13 bits per character based on the following:  
Data word length programmable from 1 to 8 bits  
Additional address bit in address-bit mode  
Parity programmable for 0 or 1 parity bit, odd or even parity  
Stop programmable for 1 or 2 stop bits  
Asynchronous or isosynchronous communication modes  
Two multiprocessor communication formats allow communication between more than two devices.  
Sleep mode is available to free CPU resources during multiprocessor communication.  
The 24-bit programmable baud rate supports 224 different baud rates provide high-accuracy baud rate selection.  
Four error flags and five status flags provide detailed information regarding SCI events.  
Capability to use DMA for transmit and receive data.  
128  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
7.11 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Module  
The I2C module is a multimaster communication module providing an interface between the  
microcontroller and devices compliant with Philips Semiconductor I2C-bus specification version 2.1 and  
connected by an I2C-bus. This module will support any slave or master I2C compatible device.  
7.11.1 Features  
The I2C module has the following features:  
Compliance to the Philips I2C bus specification, v2.1 (The I2C Specification, Philips document number  
9398 393 40011)  
Bit or Byte format transfer  
7- and 10-bit device addressing modes  
General call  
START byte  
Multimaster transmitter or slave receiver mode  
Multimaster receiver or slave transmitter mode  
Combined master transmit or receive and receive or transmit mode  
Transfer rates of 10 kbps up to 400 kbps (Phillips fast-mode rate)  
Free data format  
Two DMA events (transmit and receive)  
DMA event enable or disable capability  
Seven interrupts that can be used by the CPU  
Module enable or disable capability  
The SDA and SCL are optionally configurable as general-purpose I/O  
Slew rate control of the outputs  
Open-drain control of the outputs  
Programmable pullup or pulldown capability on the inputs  
Supports Ignore NACK mode  
NOTE  
This I2C module does not support:  
High-speed (HS) mode  
C-bus compatibility mode  
The combined format in 10-bit address mode (the I2C module sends the slave address  
second byte every time it sends the slave address first byte)  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
129  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.11.2 I2C I/O Timing Specifications  
Table 7-31. I2C Signals (SDA and SCL) Switching Characteristics(1)  
STANDARD MODE  
FAST MODE  
MIN  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MAX  
149  
Cycle time, internal module clock for I2C,  
prescaled from VCLK  
tc(I2CCLK)  
75.2  
149  
100  
75.2  
ns  
f(SCL)  
SCL clock frequency  
Cycle time, SCL  
0
0
400  
kHz  
µs  
tc(SCL)  
10  
2.5  
Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a  
repeated START condition)  
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)  
th(SCLL-SDAL)  
4.7  
4
0.6  
0.6  
µs  
µs  
Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a repeated  
START condition)  
tw(SCLL)  
Pulse duration, SCL low  
4.7  
4
1.3  
0.6  
µs  
µs  
ns  
tw(SCLH)  
Pulse duration, SCL high  
tsu(SDA-SCLH)  
Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high  
250  
100  
Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low (for I2C-bus  
devices)  
th(SDA-SCLL)  
tw(SDAH)  
tsu(SCLH-SDAH)  
tw(SP)  
0
4.7  
4.0  
3.45(2)  
0
0.9  
µs  
µs  
µs  
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and  
START conditions  
1.3  
Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP  
condition)  
0.6  
0
Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed)  
Capacitive load for each bus line  
50  
ns  
(3)  
Cb  
400  
400  
pF  
(1) The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered  
down.  
(2) The maximum th(SDA-SCLL) for I2C-bus devices has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period (tw(SCLL)) of the SCL  
signal.  
(3) Cb = The total capacitance of one bus line in pF.  
SDA  
tw(SDAH)  
tsu(SDA-SCLH)  
tw(SP)  
tw(SCLL)  
tr(SCL)  
tsu(SCLH-SDAH)  
tw(SCLH)  
SCL  
tc(SCL)  
th(SCLL-SDAL)  
tf(SCL)  
th(SCLL-SDAL)  
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)  
th(SDA-SCLL)  
Stop  
Start  
Repeated Start  
Stop  
Figure 7-19. I2C Timings  
130  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
NOTE  
A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal  
(referred to the VIHmin of the SCL signal) to bridge the undefined region of the falling  
edge of SCL.  
The maximum th(SDA-SCLL) has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period  
(tw(SCLL)) of the SCL signal.  
A Fast-mode I2C-bus device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the  
requirement tsu(SDA-SCLH) 250 ns must then be met. This will automatically be the case if  
the device does not stretch the low period of the SCL signal (tw(SCLL)). If such a device  
does stretch the low period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA  
line within tr max + tsu(SDA-SCLH). For the rise time, tr max value per load capacitance on the  
SDA pin, see Table 7-2, Rise time, tr, 2-mA-z low-EMI pins MAX values.  
• Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with fast-mode devices, faster fall-  
times are allowed.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
131  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.12 Multibuffered / Standard Serial Peripheral Interface  
The MibSPI is a high-speed synchronous serial I/O port that allows a serial bit stream of programmed  
length (2 to 16 bits) to be shifted in and out of the device at a programmed bit-transfer rate. Typical  
applications for the SPI include interfacing to external peripherals, such as I/Os, memories, display drivers,  
and ADCs.  
7.12.1 Features  
Both standard and MibSPI modules have the following features:  
16-bit shift register  
Receive buffer register  
11-bit baud clock generator  
SPICLK can be internally generated (master mode) or received from an external clock source (slave  
mode)  
Each word transferred can have a unique format  
SPI I/Os not used in the communication can be used as digital I/O signals  
Table 7-32. MibSPI/SPI Configurations  
MibSPIx/SPIx  
MibSPI1  
I/Os  
MIBSPI1SIMO[1:0], MIBSPI1SOMI[1:0], MIBSPI1CLK, MIBSPI1nCS[5:4,2:0], MIBSPI1nENA  
MIBSPI3SIMO, MIBSPI3SOMI, MIBSPI3CLK, MIBSPI3nCS[5:0], MIBSPI3nENA  
MIBSPI5SIMO[0], MIBSPI5SOMI[2:0], MIBSPI5CLK, MIBSPI5nCS[0], MIBSPI5nENA  
SPI2SIMO, SPI2SOMI, SPI2CLK, SPI2nCS[1:0], SPI2nENA  
MibSPI3  
MibSPI5  
SPI2  
SPI4  
SPI4SIMO, SPI4SOMI, SPI4CLK, SPI4nCS[0], SPI4nENA  
7.12.2 MibSPI Transmit and Receive RAM Organization  
The multibuffer RAM is comprised of 128 buffers. Each entry in the multibuffer RAM consists of four parts:  
a 16-bit transmit field, a 16-bit receive field, a 16-bit control field, and a 16-bit status field. The multibuffer  
RAM can be partitioned into multiple transfer group with variable number of buffers each. Each MibSPIx  
module supports eight transfer groups.  
7.12.3 MibSPI Transmit Trigger Events  
Each transfer group can be configured individually. For each transfer group, a trigger event and a trigger  
source can be chosen. A trigger event can be for example a rising edge or a permanent low level at a  
selectable trigger source. For example, up to 15 trigger sources are available which can be used by each  
transfer group. These trigger options are listed in Table 7-33 and Section 7.12.3.2 for MibSPI1 and  
MibSPI3, respectively.  
132  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
7.12.3.1 MibSPI1 Event Trigger Hookup  
Table 7-33. MibSPI1 Event Trigger Hookup  
EVENT NO.  
Disabled  
EVENT0  
EVENT1  
EVENT2  
EVENT3  
EVENT4  
EVENT5  
EVENT6  
EVENT7  
EVENT8  
EVENT9  
EVENT10  
EVENT11  
EVENT12  
EVENT13  
EVENT14  
TGxCTRL TRIGSRC[3:0]  
TRIGGER  
No trigger source  
GIOA[0]  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
GIOA[1]  
GIOA[2]  
GIOA[3]  
GIOA[4]  
GIOA[5]  
GIOA[6]  
GIOA[7]  
N2HET1[8]  
N2HET1[10]  
N2HET1[12]  
N2HET1[14]  
N2HET1[16]  
N2HET1[18]  
Intern Tick counter  
NOTE  
For N2HET1 trigger sources, the connection to the MibSPI1 module trigger input is made  
from the input side of the output buffer (at the N2HET1 module boundary). This way, a  
trigger condition can be generated even if the N2HET1 signal is not selected to be output on  
the pad.  
NOTE  
For GIOx trigger sources, the connection to the MibSPI1 module trigger input is made from  
the output side of the input buffer. This way, a trigger condition can be generated either by  
selecting the GIOx pin as an output pin and selecting the pin to be a GIOx pin, or by driving  
the GIOx pin from an external trigger source. If the mux control module is used to select  
different functionality instead of the GIOx signal, then care must be taken to disable GIOx  
from triggering MibSPI1 transfers; there is no multiplexing on the input connections.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
133  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.12.3.2 MibSPI3 Event Trigger Hookup  
Table 7-34. MibSPI3 Event Trigger Hookup  
EVENT NO.  
Disabled  
EVENT0  
EVENT1  
EVENT2  
EVENT3  
EVENT4  
EVENT5  
EVENT6  
EVENT7  
EVENT8  
EVENT9  
EVENT10  
EVENT11  
EVENT12  
EVENT13  
EVENT14  
TGxCTRL TRIGSRC[3:0]  
TRIGGER  
No trigger source  
GIOA[0]  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
GIOA[1]  
GIOA[2]  
GIOA[3]  
GIOA[4]  
GIOA[5]  
GIOA[6]  
GIOA[7]  
N2HET1[8]  
N2HET1[10]  
N2HET1[12]  
N2HET1[14]  
N2HET1[16]  
N2HET1[18]  
Intern Tick counter  
NOTE  
For N2HET1 trigger sources, the connection to the MibSPI3 module trigger input is made  
from the input side of the output buffer (at the N2HET1 module boundary). This way, a  
trigger condition can be generated even if the N2HET1 signal is not selected to be output on  
the pad.  
NOTE  
For GIOx trigger sources, the connection to the MibSPI3 module trigger input is made from  
the output side of the input buffer. This way, a trigger condition can be generated either by  
selecting the GIOx pin as an output pin and selecting the pin to be a GIOx pin, or by driving  
the GIOx pin from an external trigger source. If the mux control module is used to select  
different functionality instead of the GIOx signal, then care must be taken to disable GIOx  
from triggering MibSPI3 transfers; there is no multiplexing on the input connections.  
134  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
7.12.3.3 MibSPI5 Event Trigger Hookup  
Table 7-35. MibSPI5 Event Trigger Hookup  
EVENT NO.  
Disabled  
EVENT0  
EVENT1  
EVENT2  
EVENT3  
EVENT4  
EVENT5  
EVENT6  
EVENT7  
EVENT8  
EVENT9  
EVENT10  
EVENT11  
EVENT12  
EVENT13  
EVENT14  
TGxCTRL TRIGSRC[3:0]  
TRIGGER  
No trigger source  
GIOA[0]  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
GIOA[1]  
GIOA[2]  
GIOA[3]  
GIOA[4]  
GIOA[5]  
GIOA[6]  
GIOA[7]  
N2HET1[8]  
N2HET1[10]  
N2HET1[12]  
N2HET1[14]  
N2HET1[16]  
N2HET1[18]  
Intern Tick counter  
NOTE  
For N2HET1 trigger sources, the connection to the MibSPI5 module trigger input is made  
from the input side of the output buffer (at the N2HET1 module boundary). This way, a  
trigger condition can be generated even if the N2HET1 signal is not selected to be output on  
the pad.  
NOTE  
For GIOx trigger sources, the connection to the MibSPI5 module trigger input is made from  
the output side of the input buffer. This way, a trigger condition can be generated either by  
selecting the GIOx pin as an output pin and selecting the pin to be a GIOx pin, or by driving  
the GIOx pin from an external trigger source. If the mux control module is used to select  
different functionality instead of the GIOx signal, then care must be taken to disable GIOx  
from triggering MibSPI5 transfers; there is no multiplexing on the input connections.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
135  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.12.4 MibSPI/SPI Master Mode I/O Timing Specifications  
Table 7-36. SPI Master Mode External Timing Parameters (CLOCK PHASE = 0, SPICLK = output,  
SPISIMO = output, and SPISOMI = input)(1)(2)(3)  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
MAX UNIT  
1
tc(SPC)M  
Cycle time, SPICLK(4)  
40  
256tc(VCLK)  
ns  
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock  
polarity = 0)  
tw(SPCH)M  
0.5tc(SPC)M – tr(SPC)M – 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M – tf(SPC)M – 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M – tf(SPC)M – 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M – tr(SPC)M – 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M – 6  
0.5tc(SPC)M + 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M + 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M + 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M + 3  
2(5)  
3(5)  
4(5)  
5(5)  
6(5)  
7(5)  
ns  
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock  
polarity = 1)  
tw(SPCL)M  
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock  
polarity = 0)  
tw(SPCL)M  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock  
polarity = 1)  
tw(SPCH)M  
Delay time, SPISIMO valid before  
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)  
td(SPCH-SIMO)M  
td(SPCL-SIMO)M  
tv(SPCL-SIMO)M  
tv(SPCH-SIMO)M  
tsu(SOMI-SPCL)M  
tsu(SOMI-SPCH)M  
th(SPCL-SOMI)M  
th(SPCH-SOMI)M  
Delay time, SPISIMO valid before  
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)  
0.5tc(SPC)M – 6  
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after  
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)  
0.5tc(SPC)M – tf(SPC) – 4  
0.5tc(SPC)M – tr(SPC) – 4  
tf(SPC) + 2.2  
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after  
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)  
Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK  
low (clock polarity = 0)  
Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK  
high (clock polarity = 1)  
tr(SPC) + 2.2  
Hold time, SPISOMI data valid after  
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)  
10  
Hold time, SPISOMI data valid after  
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)  
10  
C2TDELAY*tc(VCLK) + 2*tc(VCLK)  
- tf(SPICS) + tr(SPC) – 7  
(C2TDELAY+2) * tc(VCLK)  
-
CSHOLD = 0  
CSHOLD = 1  
CSHOLD = 0  
CSHOLD = 1  
Setup time CS active  
until SPICLK high  
(clock polarity = 0)  
tf(SPICS) + tr(SPC) + 5.5  
C2TDELAY*tc(VCLK) + 3*tc(VCLK)  
- tf(SPICS) + tr(SPC) – 7  
(C2TDELAY+3) * tc(VCLK)  
-
tf(SPICS) + tr(SPC) + 5.5  
8(6) tC2TDELAY  
ns  
ns  
C2TDELAY*tc(VCLK) + 2*tc(VCLK)  
- tf(SPICS) + tf(SPC) – 7  
(C2TDELAY+2) * tc(VCLK)  
-
Setup time CS active  
until SPICLK low  
(clock polarity = 1)  
tf(SPICS) + tf(SPC) + 5.5  
C2TDELAY*tc(VCLK) + 3*tc(VCLK)  
- tf(SPICS) + tf(SPC) – 7  
(C2TDELAY+3) * tc(VCLK)  
-
tf(SPICS) + tf(SPC) + 5.5  
0.5*tc(SPC)M  
T2CDELAY*tc(VCLK) + tc(VCLK)  
+
-
0.5*tc(SPC)M  
T2CDELAY*tc(VCLK) + tc(VCLK)  
+
-
Hold time SPICLK low until CS inactive  
(clock polarity = 0)  
tf(SPC) + tr(SPICS) - 7  
tf(SPC) + tr(SPICS) + 11  
9(6) tT2CDELAY  
0.5*tc(SPC)M  
T2CDELAY*tc(VCLK) + tc(VCLK)  
+
-
0.5*tc(SPC)M  
T2CDELAY*tc(VCLK) + tc(VCLK)  
+
-
Hold time SPICLK high until CS  
inactive (clock polarity = 1)  
tr(SPC) + tr(SPICS) - 7  
(C2TDELAY+1) * tc(VCLK)  
tf(SPICS) – 29  
tr(SPC) + tr(SPICS) + 11  
-
10  
11  
tSPIENA  
SPIENAn Sample point  
(C2TDELAY+1)*tc(VCLK)  
ns  
ns  
SPIENAn Sample point from write to  
buffer  
tSPIENAW  
(C2TDELAY+2)*tc(VCLK)  
(1) The MASTER bit (SPIGCR1.0) is set and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPIFMTx.16) is cleared.  
(2) tc(VCLK) = interface clock cycle time = 1 / f(VCLK)  
(3) For rise and fall timings, see Table 7-2.  
(4) When the SPI is in Master mode, the following must be true:  
For PS values from 1 to 255: tc(SPC)M (PS +1)tc(VCLK) 40 ns, where PS is the prescale value set in the SPIFMTx.[15:8] register bits.  
For PS values of 0: tc(SPC)M = 2tc(VCLK) 40 ns.  
The external load on the SPICLK pin must be less than 60 pF.  
(5) The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPIFMTx.17).  
(6) C2TDELAY and T2CDELAY is programmed in the SPIDELAY register.  
136  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
1
SPICLK  
(clock polarity = 0)  
2
3
SPICLK  
(clock polarity = 1)  
4
5
SPISIMO  
Master Out Data Is Valid  
6
7
Master In Data  
Must Be Valid  
SPISOMI  
Figure 7-20. SPI Master Mode External Timing (CLOCK PHASE = 0)  
Write to buffer  
SPICLK  
(clock polarity=0)  
SPICLK  
(clock polarity=1)  
SPISIMO  
SPICSn  
Master Out Data Is Valid  
8
9
10  
11  
SPIENAn  
Figure 7-21. SPI Master Mode Chip-Select Timing (CLOCK PHASE = 0)  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
137  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 7-37. SPI Master Mode External Timing Parameters (CLOCK PHASE = 1, SPICLK = output,  
SPISIMO = output, and SPISOMI = input)(1)(2)(3)  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
MAX UNIT  
(4)  
1
tc(SPC)M  
Cycle time, SPICLK  
40  
256tc(VCLK) ns  
Pulse duration, SPICLK high  
(clock polarity = 0)  
tw(SPCH)M  
0.5tc(SPC)M – tr(SPC)M – 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M – tf(SPC)M – 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M – tf(SPC)M – 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M – tr(SPC)M – 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M + 3  
2(5)  
ns  
ns  
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock  
polarity = 1)  
tw(SPCL)M  
tw(SPCL)M  
tw(SPCH)M  
0.5tc(SPC)M + 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M + 3  
0.5tc(SPC)M + 3  
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock  
polarity = 0)  
3(5)  
Pulse duration, SPICLK high  
(clock polarity = 1)  
Valid time, SPICLK high after  
SPISIMO data valid (clock polarity  
= 0)  
tv(SIMO-SPCH)M  
tv(SIMO-SPCL)M  
tv(SPCH-SIMO)M  
tv(SPCL-SIMO)M  
0.5tc(SPC)M – 6  
4(5)  
ns  
Valid time, SPICLK low after  
SPISIMO data valid (clock polarity  
= 1)  
0.5tc(SPC)M – 6  
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid  
after SPICLK high (clock polarity =  
0)  
0.5tc(SPC)M – tr(SPC) – 4  
5(5)  
6(5)  
7(5)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid  
after SPICLK low (clock polarity =  
1)  
0.5tc(SPC)M – tf(SPC) – 4  
Setup time, SPISOMI before  
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)  
tsu(SOMI-SPCH)M  
tsu(SOMI-SPCL)M  
tr(SPC)+ 2.2  
tf(SPC)+ 2.2  
Setup time, SPISOMI before  
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)  
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid  
after SPICLK high (clock polarity =  
0)  
tv(SPCH-SOMI)M  
10  
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid  
after SPICLK low (clock polarity =  
1)  
tv(SPCL-SOMI)M  
10  
0.5*tc(SPC)M + (C2TDELAY+2) *  
0.5*tc(SPC)M + (C2TDELAY+2) *  
CSHOLD =  
tc(VCLK)  
-
tc(VCLK) -  
Setup time CS  
0
tf(SPICS) + tr(SPC) – 7  
tf(SPICS) + tr(SPC) + 5.5  
active until SPICLK  
high (clock polarity =  
0.5*tc(SPC)M + (C2TDELAY+3) *  
0.5*tc(SPC)M + (C2TDELAY+3) *  
CSHOLD =  
0)  
tc(VCLK)  
-
tc(VCLK) -  
tf(SPICS) + tr(SPC) + 5.5  
1
tf(SPICS) + tr(SPC) – 7  
8(6) tC2TDELAY  
ns  
0.5*tc(SPC)M + (C2TDELAY+2) *  
0.5*tc(SPC)M + (C2TDELAY+2) *  
CSHOLD =  
tc(VCLK)  
-
tc(VCLK) -  
tf(SPICS) + tf(SPC) + 5.5  
Setup time CS  
0
tf(SPICS) + tf(SPC) – 7  
active until SPICLK  
low (clock polarity =  
0.5*tc(SPC)M + (C2TDELAY+3) *  
0.5*tc(SPC)M + (C2TDELAY+3) *  
CSHOLD =  
1)  
tc(VCLK)  
-
tc(VCLK)  
-
1
tf(SPICS) + tf(SPC) – 7  
tf(SPICS) + tf(SPC) + 5.5  
T2CDELAY*tc(VCLK) + tc(VCLK)  
tf(SPC)  
-
+
T2CDELAY*tc(VCLK) + tc(VCLK)  
tf(SPC)  
-
+
Hold time SPICLK low until CS  
inactive (clock polarity = 0)  
tr(SPICS) - 7  
tr(SPICS) + 11  
9(6) tT2CDELAY  
ns  
T2CDELAY*tc(VCLK) + tc(VCLK)  
tr(SPC)  
-
+
T2CDELAY*tc(VCLK) + tc(VCLK)  
tr(SPC)  
-
+
Hold time SPICLK high until CS  
inactive (clock polarity = 1)  
tr(SPICS) - 7  
tr(SPICS) + 11  
(1) The MASTER bit (SPIGCR1.0) is set and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPIFMTx.16) is set.  
(2) tc(VCLK) = interface clock cycle time = 1 / f(VCLK)  
(3) For rise and fall timings, see Table 7-2.  
(4) When the SPI is in Master mode, the following must be true:  
For PS values from 1 to 255: tc(SPC)M (PS +1)tc(VCLK) 40 ns, where PS is the prescale value set in the SPIFMTx.[15:8] register bits.  
For PS values of 0: tc(SPC)M = 2tc(VCLK) 40 ns.  
The external load on the SPICLK pin must be less than 60 pF.  
(5) The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPIFMTx.17).  
(6) C2TDELAY and T2CDELAY is programmed in the SPIDELAY register.  
138  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
Table 7-37. SPI Master Mode External Timing Parameters (CLOCK PHASE = 1, SPICLK = output,  
SPISIMO = output, and SPISOMI = input)(1)(2)(3) (continued)  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
MAX UNIT  
(C2TDELAY+1)* tc(VCLK)  
-
10 tSPIENA  
SPIENAn Sample Point  
(C2TDELAY+1)*tc(VCLK) ns  
tf(SPICS) – 29  
SPIENAn Sample point from write  
to buffer  
11 tSPIENAW  
(C2TDELAY+2)*tc(VCLK) ns  
1
SPICLK  
(clock polarity = 0)  
2
3
SPICLK  
(clock polarity = 1)  
4
5
Master Out Data Is Valid  
Data Valid  
SPISIMO  
SPISOMI  
6
7
Master In Data  
Must Be Valid  
Figure 7-22. SPI Master Mode External Timing (CLOCK PHASE = 1)  
Write to buffer  
SPICLK  
(clock polarity=0)  
SPICLK  
(clock polarity=1)  
SPISIMO  
SPICSn  
Master Out Data Is Valid  
8
9
10  
11  
SPIENAn  
Figure 7-23. SPI Master Mode Chip-Select Timing (CLOCK PHASE = 1)  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
139  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
7.12.5 SPI Slave Mode I/O Timings  
Table 7-38. SPI Slave Mode External Timing Parameters (CLOCK PHASE = 0, SPICLK = input,  
SPISIMO = input, and SPISOMI = output)(1)(2)(3)(4)  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
tc(SPC)S  
MIN  
40  
MAX UNIT  
1
Cycle time, SPICLK(5)  
ns  
tw(SPCH)S  
tw(SPCL)S  
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)  
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)  
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)  
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)  
14  
2(6)  
3(6)  
ns  
ns  
14  
tw(SPCL)S  
14  
tw(SPCH)S  
14  
Delay time, SPISOMI valid after SPICLK high (clock  
polarity = 0)  
td(SPCH-SOMI)S  
td(SPCL-SOMI)S  
th(SPCH-SOMI)S  
th(SPCL-SOMI)S  
tsu(SIMO-SPCL)S  
tsu(SIMO-SPCH)S  
th(SPCL-SIMO)S  
th(SPCH-SIMO)S  
td(SPCL-SENAH)S  
td(SPCH-SENAH)S  
td(SCSL-SENAL)S  
trf(SOMI) + 20  
4(6)  
5(6)  
6(6)  
7(6)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Delay time, SPISOMI valid after SPICLK low (clock  
polarity = 1)  
trf(SOMI) + 20  
Hold time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK high (clock  
polarity =0)  
2
Hold time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK low (clock  
polarity =1)  
2
Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK low (clock polarity  
= 0)  
4
Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK high (clock  
polarity = 1)  
4
2
Hold time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK low (clock  
polarity = 0)  
Hold time, SPISIMO data valid after S PICLK high  
(clock polarity = 1)  
2
Delay time, SPIENAn high after last SPICLK low (clock  
polarity = 0)  
1.5tc(VCLK)  
1.5tc(VCLK)  
tf(ENAn)  
2.5tc(VCLK)+tr(ENAn)+22  
2.5tc(VCLK)+tr(ENAn)+22  
tc(VCLK)+tf(ENAn)+27  
8
9
ns  
ns  
Delay time, SPIENAn high after last SPICLK high (clock  
polarity = 1)  
Delay time, SPIENAn low after SPICSn low (if new data  
has been written to the SPI buffer)  
(1) The MASTER bit (SPIGCR1.0) is cleared and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPIFMTx.16) is cleared.  
(2) If the SPI is in slave mode, the following must be true: tc(SPC)S (PS + 1) tc(VCLK), where PS = prescale value set in SPIFMTx.[15:8].  
(3) For rise and fall timings, see Table 7-2.  
(4) tc(VCLK) = interface clock cycle time = 1 /f(VCLK)  
(5) When the SPI is in Slave mode, the following must be true:  
For PS values from 1 to 255: tc(SPC)S (PS +1)tc(VCLK) 40 ns, where PS is the prescale value set in the SPIFMTx.[15:8] register bits.  
For PS values of 0: tc(SPC)S = 2tc(VCLK) 40 ns.  
(6) The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPIFMTx.17).  
140  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
1
SPICLK  
(clock polarity = 0)  
2
3
SPICLK  
(clock polarity = 1)  
5
4
SPISOMI Data Is Valid  
SPISOMI  
SPISIMO  
6
7
SPISIMO Data  
Must Be Valid  
Figure 7-24. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (CLOCK PHASE = 0)  
SPICLK  
(clock polarity=0)  
SPICLK  
(clock polarity=1)  
8
SPIENAn  
SPICSn  
9
Figure 7-25. SPI Slave Mode Enable Timing (CLOCK PHASE = 0)  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
141  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Table 7-39. SPI Slave Mode External Timing Parameters (CLOCK PHASE = 1, SPICLK = input, SPISIMO =  
input, and SPISOMI = output)(1)(2)(3)(4)  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
Cycle time, SPICLK(5)  
MIN  
40  
MAX  
UNIT  
1
tc(SPC)S  
ns  
tw(SPCH)S  
tw(SPCL)S  
tw(SPCL)S  
tw(SPCH)S  
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)  
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)  
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)  
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)  
14  
2(6)  
3(6)  
ns  
ns  
14  
14  
14  
Delay time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK low  
(clock polarity = 0)  
td(SOMI-SPCL)S  
td(SOMI-SPCH)S  
th(SPCL-SOMI)S  
th(SPCH-SOMI)S  
tsu(SIMO-SPCH)S  
tsu(SIMO-SPCL)S  
tv(SPCH-SIMO)S  
tv(SPCL-SIMO)S  
td(SPCH-SENAH)S  
td(SPCL-SENAH)S  
td(SCSL-SENAL)S  
td(SCSL-SOMI)S  
trf(SOMI) + 20  
trf(SOMI) + 20  
4(6)  
5(6)  
6(6)  
7(6)  
8
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Delay time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK high  
(clock polarity = 1)  
Hold time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK high  
(clock polarity =0)  
2
2
4
4
2
2
Hold time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK low (clock  
polarity =1)  
Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK high (clock  
polarity = 0)  
Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK low (clock polarity  
= 1)  
High time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK high  
(clock polarity = 0)  
High time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK low (clock  
polarity = 1)  
Delay time, SPIENAn high after last SPICLK high  
(clock polarity = 0)  
1.5tc(VCLK) 2.5tc(VCLK)+tr(ENAn)+22  
1.5tc(VCLK) 2.5tc(VCLK)+tr(ENAn)+22  
Delay time, SPIENAn high after last SPICLK low (clock  
polarity = 1)  
Delay time, SPIENAn low after SPICSn low (if new data  
has been written to the SPI buffer)  
tc(VCLK)+tf(ENAn)  
9
tf(ENAn)  
tc(VCLK)  
ns  
ns  
+27  
Delay time, SOMI valid after SPICSn low (if new data  
has been written to the SPI buffer)  
10  
2tc(VCLK)+trf(SOMI)+28  
(1) The MASTER bit (SPIGCR1.0) is cleared and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPIFMTx.16) is set.  
(2) If the SPI is in slave mode, the following must be true: tc(SPC)S (PS + 1) tc(VCLK), where PS = prescale value set in SPIFMTx.[15:8].  
(3) For rise and fall timings, see Table 7-2.  
(4) tc(VCLK) = interface clock cycle time = 1 /f(VCLK)  
(5) When the SPI is in Slave mode, the following must be true:  
For PS values from 1 to 255: tc(SPC)S (PS +1)tc(VCLK) 40 ns, where PS is the prescale value set in the SPIFMTx.[15:8] register bits.  
For PS values of 0: tc(SPC)S = 2tc(VCLK) 40 ns.  
(6) The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPIFMTx.17).  
142  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
1
SPICLK  
(clock polarity = 0)  
2
3
SPICLK  
(clock polarity = 1)  
5
4
SPISOMI  
SPISOMI Data Is Valid  
6
7
SPISIMO Data  
Must Be Valid  
SPISIMO  
Figure 7-26. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (CLOCK PHASE = 1)  
SPICLK  
(clock polarity=0)  
SPICLK  
(clock polarity=1)  
8
SPIENAn  
SPICSn  
9
10  
SPISOMI  
Slave Out Data Is Valid  
Figure 7-27. SPI Slave Mode Enable Timing (CLOCK PHASE = 1)  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
143  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
8 Applications, Implementation, and Layout  
NOTE  
Information in the following sections is not part of the TI component specification, and TI  
does not warrant its accuracy or completeness. TI’s customers are responsible for  
determining suitability of components for their purposes. Customers should validate and test  
their design implementation to confirm system functionality.  
8.1 TI Designs or Reference Designs  
TI Designs Reference Design Library is a robust reference design library spanning analog, embedded  
processor, and connectivity. Created by TI experts to help you jump start your system design, all TI  
Designs include schematic or block diagrams, BOMs, and design files to speed your time to market.  
Search and download designs at TIDesigns.  
144  
Applications, Implementation, and Layout  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
9 Device and Documentation Support  
9.1 Getting Started and Next Steps  
To get started using a TMS570 Hercules™ ARM® Cortex®-R Microcontroller (MCU):  
1. Purchase a TMS570 LaunchPad Development Kit with the LaunchPAD Quickstart Guide included.  
From the LaunchPAD Quickstart Guide, the user can easily determine the correct Code Composer  
Studio™ (CCS) Integrated Development Environment (IDE) and Hardware Abstraction Layer Code  
Generator (HALCoGen™) GUI-based chip configuration tool for any selected Hercules MCU device(s).  
2. Download the latest version of CCS IDE for Safety MCUs for the specified host platform (that is,  
Windows, Linux, or MacOS) (free as long as using a LaunchPAD or a Hercules MCU Development Kit  
[HDK])  
3. Under Order Now, download the HALCOGEN: HAL Code Generator tool.  
4. For additional tools and software descriptions, web page links, key docs, and so forth, see Tools and  
Software.  
The Hercules TMS570 family also has TI BoosterPack™ plug-in modules available that fit on top of a  
LaunchPad development kit.  
9.2 Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature  
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of  
all devices and support tools. Each commercial family member has one of three prefixes: TMX, TMP,  
or TMS (for example,TMS570LS0714). These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of product  
development from engineering prototypes (TMX) through fully qualified production devices/tools (TMS).  
Device development evolutionary flow:  
TMX  
TMP  
TMS  
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical  
specifications.  
Final silicon die that conforms to the device's electrical specifications but has not completed  
quality and reliability verification.  
Fully-qualified production device.  
TMX and TMP devices are shipped against the following disclaimer:  
"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."  
TMS devices have been characterized fully, and the quality and reliability of the device have been  
demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.  
Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard  
production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production  
system because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices  
are to be used.  
Figure 9-1 shows the numbering and symbol nomenclature for the TMS570LS0714 devices.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Device and Documentation Support  
145  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Full Part #  
TMS  
TMS  
570  
570  
LS 07  
07  
1
1
4
4
A
A
PGE  
PGE  
Q
Q
Q1  
Q1  
R
R
Orderable Part #  
Prefix: TM  
TMS = Fully Qualified  
TMP = Prototype  
TMX = Samples  
Core Technology:  
570 = Cortex R4F  
Architecture:  
LS = Dual CPUs in Lockstep  
(not included in orderable part #)  
Flash Memory Size:  
07 = 768KB  
RAM MemorySize:  
1 = 128KB  
Peripheral Set:  
Die Revision:  
Blank = Initial Die  
A = Die Revision A  
Package Type:  
PGE = 144-Pin Plastic Quad Flatpack  
PZ = 100-Pin Plastic Quad Flatpack  
Temperature Range:  
Q = œ40oC to 125oC  
Quality Designator:  
Q1 = Automotive  
Shipping Options:  
R = Tape and Reel  
Figure 9-1. TMS570LS0714 Device Numbering Conventions  
146  
Device and Documentation Support  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
9.3 Tools and Software  
TI offers an extensive line of tools and software for the Hercules™ Safety generation of MCUs including  
development tools to evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm  
implementations, and fully integrate and debug software and hardware modules.  
9.3.1 Kits and Evaluation Modules for Hercules TMS570 MCUs  
The TMS570 Hercules™ ARM® Cortex®-R Microcontrollers (MCUs) offer a variety of hardware platforms  
to help speed development. From low-cost LaunchPad™ development kits to full-featured application  
developer platforms, the Hercules TMS570 MCUs provide a wide range of hardware development tools  
designed to aid development and get customers to market faster.  
Hercules™ TMS570LS12x LaunchPad™ Development Kit  
LAUNCHXL2-TMS57012 — The Hercules TMS570LS12x LaunchPad development kit is a low-cost  
evaluation platform that helps users get started quickly in evaluating and developing with the Hercules  
microcontroller family, which is specifically designed for ISO 26262 and IEC 61508 functional safety  
automotive applications. The LaunchPad features onboard emulation for programming and debugging;  
push-buttons; LEDs and ambient light sensor; and two standard 40-pin BoosterPack expansion  
connectors. Through the expansion connectors, the LaunchPad development kit can support a wide range  
of BoosterPack plug-in modules for added functionality (such as displays, wireless sensors, and so forth).  
LaunchPad development kits come preprogrammed with a demo code that lets the user easily learn the  
key safety, data acquisition, and control features of the Hercules MCU platform. For additional software  
downloads and other resources, visit the Hercules LaunchPads wiki.  
9.3.2 Development Tools  
Development tools includes both hardware and software development tools like integrated development  
environment (IDE), compilers, and emulators.  
Software  
Code Composer Studio™ (CCS) Integrated Development Environment (IDE) – Code Composer Studio is  
an integrated development environment (IDE) that supports TI's Microcontroller and Embedded  
Processors portfolio. Code Composer Studio comprises a suite of tools used to develop and debug  
embedded applications. It includes an optimizing C/C++ compiler, source code editor, project build  
environment, debugger, profiler, and many other features. The intuitive IDE provides a single user  
interface taking the user through each step of the application development flow. Familiar tools and  
interfaces allow users to get started faster than ever before. Code Composer Studio combines the  
advantages of the Eclipse software framework with advanced embedded debug capabilities from TI  
resulting in a compelling feature-rich development environment for embedded developers.  
CCS Uniflash Standalone Flash Tool for TI Microcontrollers (MCUs) [available free of charge] – CCS  
Uniflash is a standalone tool used to program the on-chip flash memory available on TI MCUs. The CCS  
Uniflash has a GUI, command line, and scripting interface.  
SafeTI™ Compiler Qualification Kit – The SafeTI Compiler Qualification Kit was developed to assist  
customers in qualifying their use of the TI ARM or C2000 C/C++ Compiler to functional safety standards  
such as IEC 61508 SIL 3 and ISO 26262 ASIL D.  
High-End Timer Integrated Development Environment (HET IDE) – The HET module available on the  
Hercules MCU devices is a programmable timer coprocessor that enables sophisticated functions for real-  
time control applications. The HET IDE is a windows-based application that provides an easy way to get  
started developing and debugging code for the HET module.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Device and Documentation Support  
147  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
Hardware  
Emulators  
Below is a list of some emulators that can be used with the Hercules TMS570 MCU devices. For a full list  
of emulators, click on the Emulators link above.  
XDS100v2 – Low-cost, low-performance emulator – integrated on Hercules TMS570 MCU Development  
Kits. With CCS IDE and IAR support.  
XDS200 – The XDS200 is a JTAG emulator for TI embedded processors. Offering a balance of cost and  
performance, XDS200 emulator fits between the ultra-low cost XDS100 and the high-performance  
XDS560v2 products.  
XDS560v2 – The XDS560™ family of emulators is designed to achieve high download speeds and is  
ideal for larger applications.  
9.3.3 Software  
Software includes Real-Time Operating Systems (RTOS), peripheral drivers, libraries, example code, and  
connectivity.  
Hercules MCU software is designed to simplify and speed development of functional safety applications.  
Hardware Abstraction Layer Code Generator (HALCoGen) for Hercules MCUs provides a graphical user  
interface that allows the user to configure peripherals, interrupts, clocks, and many other MCU parameters  
and can generate driver code which can be easily imported into integrated development environments like  
CCS IDE, IAR Workbench, etc. The HALCoGen tool also includes several example projects.  
SafeTI HALCoGen Compliance Support Package (CSP) assists customers using HALCoGen to comply  
with functional safety standards by providing example documentation, reports, and unit-test capability.  
The SafeTI Hercules Diagnostic Library is a software library of functions and response handlers for  
various safety features of the Hercules Safety MCUs.  
SafeTI Hercules Diagnostic Library CSP assists customers using the SafeTI Diagnostic Library to comply  
with functional safety standards by providing documentation and reports.  
Hercules™ Safety MCU Cortex®-R4 CMSIS DSP Library. The ARM® Cortex® Microcontroller Software  
Interface Standard (CMSIS) includes over 60 functions covering vector operations, matrix computing,  
complex arithmetic, filter functions, control functions, PID controller, Fourier transforms, and many other  
frequently used DSP algorithms. Most algorithms are available in floating-point and various fixed-point  
formats and are optimized for the Cortex-R series processors.  
Hercules™ F021 Flash API provides a software library of functions to program, erase, and verify F021 on-  
chip flash memory Hercules devices.  
The Hercules™ TMS570 MCUs are supported by many different Real-Time Operating Systems (RTOS)  
and Connectivity/Middleware options from various providers, some of which are safety certified.  
148  
Device and Documentation Support  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
9.4 Documentation Support  
To receive notification of documentation updates, navigate to the device product folder on ti.com. In the  
upper right corner, click on Alert me to register and receive a weekly digest of any product information that  
has changed. For change details, review the revision history included in any revised document.  
The following documents describe the processor, related internal peripherals, and other technical collateral  
with respect to the TMS570LS0714 microcontroller.  
Errata  
TMS570LS09xx/07xx 16/32-Bit RISC Flash Microcontroller Silicon Errata (Silicon Revision 0)  
(SPNZ215) describes the known exceptions to the functional specifications for the device.  
TMS570LS09xx/07xx 16/32-Bit RISC Flash Microcontroller Silicon Errata (Silicon Revision A)  
(SPNZ230) describes the known exceptions to the functional specifications for the device.  
Technical Reference Manuals  
TMS570LS09x/07x 16/32-Bit RISC Flash Microcontroller Technical Reference Manual (SPNU607)  
details the integration, the environment, the functional description, and the programming models for each  
peripheral and subsystem in the device.  
Applications Reports  
Compatibility Considerations: Migrating From TMS570LS31x/21x or TMS570LS12x/11x to  
TMS570LS0914/0714 Safety Microcontrollers (SPNA204) provides a summary of the differences  
between the TMS570LS0914/0714 versus the TMS570LS31x/21x and TMS570LS12x/11x series of  
microcontrollers.  
9.5 Community Resources  
The following links connect to TI community resources. Linked contents are provided "AS IS" by the  
respective contributors. They do not constitute TI specifications and do not necessarily reflect TI's views;  
see TI's Terms of Use.  
TI E2E™ Online Community The TI engineer-ro-engineer (E2E) community was created to foster  
collaboration among engineers. At e2e.ti.com, you can ask questions, share knowledge,  
explore ideas and help solve problems with fellow engineers.  
TI Embedded Processors Wiki Established to help developers get started with Embedded Processors  
from Texas Instruments and to foster innovation and growth of general knowledge about the  
hardware and software surrounding these devices.  
Hercules™ Safety Microcontrollers Forum TI's Hercules™ Safety Microcontrollers Forum was created  
under the E2E umbrella to foster collaboration among engineers, ask questions, share  
knowledge, explore ideas, and help solve problems, specifically relating to the Hercules  
Safety MCUs (that is, TMS570 and RM families).  
SafeTI™ Documentation Private E2E Forum A private E2E forum to request access to the safety  
analysis report; ask questions; share knowledge; and explore ideas to help resolve problems  
relating to the safety analysis report. This forum is closely monitored by the TI Safety  
experts. The safety analysis report itself includes detailed device-level Failure Modes,  
Effects, and Diagnostics Analysis (FMEDA) for ISO 26262 and IEC 61508 functional safety  
applications. The report also includes tools for estimating module and device-level failure  
rates (fault insertion tests (FIT) rates).  
9.6 Trademarks  
BoosterPack, Hercules, LaunchPad, XDS560, E2E are trademarks of Texas Instruments.  
CoreSight is a trademark of ARM Limited (or its subsidiaries) in the EU and/or elsewhere. All rights  
reserved.  
ARM, Cortex are registered trademarks of ARM Limited (or its subsidiaries) in the EU and/or elsewhere.  
All rights reserved.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Device and Documentation Support  
149  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
9.7 Electrostatic Discharge Caution  
This integrated circuit can be damaged by ESD. Texas Instruments recommends that all integrated circuits be handled with  
appropriate precautions. Failure to observe proper handling and installation procedures can cause damage.  
ESD damage can range from subtle performance degradation to complete device failure. Precision integrated circuits may be more  
susceptible to damage because very small parametric changes could cause the device not to meet its published specifications.  
9.8 Glossary  
TI Glossary This glossary lists and explains terms, acronyms, and definitions.  
150  
Device and Documentation Support  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
9.9 Device Identification  
9.9.1 Device Identification Code Register  
The device identification code register at address 0xFFFFFFF0 identifies several aspects of the device  
including the silicon version. The details of the device identification code register are shown in Table 9-1.  
The device identification code register value for this device is:  
Rev 0 = 0x8052AD05  
Rev A = 0x8052AD0D  
Figure 9-2. Device ID Bit Allocation Register  
31  
CP15  
R-1  
30  
29  
13  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
17  
16  
TECH  
R-0  
UNIQUE ID  
R-00000000101001  
15  
14  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
2
1
1
0
0
1
TECH  
I/O  
PERIPH FLASH ECC  
RAM  
ECC  
REVISION  
VOLT PARITY  
AGE  
R-101  
R-0  
R-1  
R-10  
R-1  
R-00000  
R-1  
R-0  
R-1  
LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset  
Table 9-1. Device ID Bit Allocation Register Field Descriptions  
BIT  
FIELD  
VALUE  
DESCRIPTION  
Indicates the presence of coprocessor 15  
31  
CP15  
1
CP15 present  
Unique device identification number  
This bitfield holds a unique number for a dedicated device configuration (die).  
30-17  
16-13  
UNIQUE ID  
TECH  
101001  
Process technology on which the device is manufactured.  
0101  
F021  
I/O voltage of the device.  
I/O are 3.3 V  
12  
11  
I/O VOLTAGE  
PERIPH PARITY  
FLASH ECC  
0
1
Peripheral Parity  
Parity on peripheral memories  
Flash ECC  
10-9  
10  
1
Program memory with ECC  
Indicates if RAM ECC is present.  
ECC implemented  
8
RAM ECC  
7-3  
2-0  
REVISION  
101  
Revision of the Device.  
The platform family ID is always 0b101  
9.9.2 Die Identification Registers  
The two die ID registers at addresses 0xFFFFFF7C and 0xFFFFFF80 form a 64-bit dieid with the  
information as shown in Table 9-2.  
Table 9-2. Die-ID Registers  
ITEM  
X Coord. on Wafer  
Y Coord. on Wafer  
Wafer #  
NO. OF BITS  
BIT LOCATION  
0xFFFFFF7C[11:0]  
0xFFFFFF7C[23:12]  
0xFFFFFF7C[31:24]  
0xFFFFFF80[23:0]  
0xFFFFFF80[31:24]  
12  
12  
8
Lot #  
24  
8
Reserved  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Device and Documentation Support  
151  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
 
 
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
9.10 Module Certifications  
The following communications modules have received certification of adherence to a standard.  
152  
Device and Documentation Support  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
9.10.1 DCAN Certification  
Figure 9-3. DCAN Certification  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Device and Documentation Support  
153  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
9.10.2 LIN Certification  
9.10.2.1 LIN Master Mode  
Figure 9-4. LIN Certification - Master Mode  
154  
Device and Documentation Support  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
9.10.2.2 LIN Slave Mode - Fixed Baud Rate  
Figure 9-5. LIN Certification - Slave Mode - Fixed Baud Rate  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Device and Documentation Support  
155  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
www.ti.com  
9.10.2.3 LIN Slave Mode - Adaptive Baud Rate  
Figure 9-6. LIN Certification - Slave Mode - Adaptive Baud Rate  
156  
Device and Documentation Support  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
TMS570LS0714  
www.ti.com  
SPNS226E JUNE 2013REVISED NOVEMBER 2016  
10 Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information  
10.1 Packaging Information  
The following pages include mechanical packaging and orderable information. This information is the most  
current data available for the designated devices. This data is subject to change without notice and  
without revision of this document. For browser-based versions of this data sheet, refer to the left-hand  
navigation.  
Copyright © 2013–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS570LS0714  
157  
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM  
www.ti.com  
10-Dec-2020  
PACKAGING INFORMATION  
Orderable Device  
Status Package Type Package Pins Package  
Eco Plan  
Lead finish/  
Ball material  
MSL Peak Temp  
Op Temp (°C)  
Device Marking  
Samples  
Drawing  
Qty  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4/5)  
(6)  
TMS5700714APGEQQ1  
TMS5700714APGEQQ1R  
TMS5700714APZQQ1  
ACTIVE  
LQFP  
LQFP  
LQFP  
PGE  
144  
144  
100  
60  
RoHS & Green  
RoHS & Green  
RoHS & Green  
NIPDAU  
Level-3-260C-168 HR  
Level-3-260C-168 HR  
Level-3-260C-168 HR  
-40 to 125  
-40 to 125  
-40 to 125  
TMS570LS  
0714APGEQQ1  
ACTIVE  
ACTIVE  
PGE  
500  
90  
NIPDAU  
NIPDAU  
TMS570LS  
0714APGEQQ1  
PZ  
TMS570LS  
0714APZQQ1  
(1) The marketing status values are defined as follows:  
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.  
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.  
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.  
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.  
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.  
(2) RoHS: TI defines "RoHS" to mean semiconductor products that are compliant with the current EU RoHS requirements for all 10 RoHS substances, including the requirement that RoHS substance  
do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, "RoHS" products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes. TI may  
reference these types of products as "Pb-Free".  
RoHS Exempt: TI defines "RoHS Exempt" to mean products that contain lead but are compliant with EU RoHS pursuant to a specific EU RoHS exemption.  
Green: TI defines "Green" to mean the content of Chlorine (Cl) and Bromine (Br) based flame retardants meet JS709B low halogen requirements of <=1000ppm threshold. Antimony trioxide based  
flame retardants must also meet the <=1000ppm threshold requirement.  
(3) MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature.  
(4) There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device.  
(5) Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation  
of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device.  
(6)  
Lead finish/Ball material - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead finish/Ball material values may wrap to two  
lines if the finish value exceeds the maximum column width.  
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information  
provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and  
continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals.  
TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release.  
Addendum-Page 1  
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM  
www.ti.com  
10-Dec-2020  
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis.  
Addendum-Page 2  
PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION  
www.ti.com  
5-Jan-2022  
TRAY  
Chamfer on Tray corner indicates Pin 1 orientation of packed units.  
*All dimensions are nominal  
Device  
Package Package Pins SPQ Unit array  
Max  
matrix temperature  
(°C)  
L (mm)  
W
K0  
P1  
CL  
CW  
Name  
Type  
(mm) (µm) (mm) (mm) (mm)  
TMS5700714APGEQQ1  
TMS5700714APZQQ1  
PGE  
PZ  
LQFP  
LQFP  
144  
100  
60  
90  
5X12  
150  
150  
315 135.9 7620 25.4  
315 135.9 7620 20.3  
17.8 17.55  
15.4 15.4  
6 x 15  
Pack Materials-Page 1  
MECHANICAL DATA  
MTQF017A – OCTOBER 1994 – REVISED DECEMBER 1996  
PGE (S-PQFP-G144)  
PLASTIC QUAD FLATPACK  
108  
73  
109  
72  
0,27  
M
0,08  
0,17  
0,50  
0,13 NOM  
144  
37  
1
36  
Gage Plane  
17,50 TYP  
20,20  
SQ  
19,80  
0,25  
0,05 MIN  
22,20  
SQ  
0°7°  
21,80  
0,75  
0,45  
1,45  
1,35  
Seating Plane  
0,08  
1,60 MAX  
4040147/C 10/96  
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.  
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.  
C. Falls within JEDEC MS-026  
1
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265  
MECHANICAL DATA  
MTQF013A – OCTOBER 1994 – REVISED DECEMBER 1996  
PZ (S-PQFP-G100)  
PLASTIC QUAD FLATPACK  
0,27  
0,17  
0,50  
75  
M
0,08  
51  
50  
76  
26  
100  
0,13 NOM  
1
25  
12,00 TYP  
Gage Plane  
14,20  
SQ  
13,80  
0,25  
16,20  
SQ  
0,05 MIN  
0°7°  
15,80  
1,45  
1,35  
0,75  
0,45  
Seating Plane  
0,08  
1,60 MAX  
4040149/B 11/96  
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.  
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.  
C. Falls within JEDEC MS-026  
1
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265  
IMPORTANT NOTICE AND DISCLAIMER  
TI PROVIDES TECHNICAL AND RELIABILITY DATA (INCLUDING DATA SHEETS), DESIGN RESOURCES (INCLUDING REFERENCE  
DESIGNS), APPLICATION OR OTHER DESIGN ADVICE, WEB TOOLS, SAFETY INFORMATION, AND OTHER RESOURCES “AS IS”  
AND WITH ALL FAULTS, AND DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD  
PARTY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.  
These resources are intended for skilled developers designing with TI products. You are solely responsible for (1) selecting the appropriate  
TI products for your application, (2) designing, validating and testing your application, and (3) ensuring your application meets applicable  
standards, and any other safety, security, regulatory or other requirements.  
These resources are subject to change without notice. TI grants you permission to use these resources only for development of an  
application that uses the TI products described in the resource. Other reproduction and display of these resources is prohibited. No license  
is granted to any other TI intellectual property right or to any third party intellectual property right. TI disclaims responsibility for, and you  
will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against, any claims, damages, costs, losses, and liabilities arising out of your use of these  
resources.  
TI’s products are provided subject to TI’s Terms of Sale or other applicable terms available either on ti.com or provided in conjunction with  
such TI products. TI’s provision of these resources does not expand or otherwise alter TI’s applicable warranties or warranty disclaimers for  
TI products.  
TI objects to and rejects any additional or different terms you may have proposed. IMPORTANT NOTICE  
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265  
Copyright © 2022, Texas Instruments Incorporated  

相关型号:

TMS570LS0714-S

基于 ARM Cortex-R5 的高性能 32 位微控制器

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
TI

TMS570LS0914

16/32 位 RISC 闪存 MCU,Arm Cortex-R4F,通过 Q-100 车规认证

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
TI

TMS570LS10106

16/32-BIT RISC Flash Microcontroller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
TI

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
TI

TMS570LS10116

16/32-BIT RISC Flash Microcontroller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
TI

TMS570LS10206

16/32-BIT RISC Flash Microcontroller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
TI

TMS570LS10216

16/32-BIT RISC Flash Microcontroller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
TI

TMS570LS1114

16/32 位 RISC 闪存 MCU,Cortex R4F,通过 Q100 车规认证

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
TI

TMS570LS1115

16/32 位 RISC 闪存 MCU,Cortex R4F,通过 Q100 车规认证,Flexray

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
TI

TMS570LS1224

16/32 位 RISC 闪存 MCU,Cortex R4F,通过 Q100 车规认证

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
TI

TMS570LS1225

16/32 位 RISC 闪存 MCU,Cortex R4F,通过 Q100 车规认证,Flexray

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
TI

TMS570LS1227

16/32 位 RISC 闪存 MCU,Cortex R4F,通过 Q100 车规认证,EMAC

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
TI